Manual Operare Bizerba En

Retail scale BC II Basic Class II Operating instructions from program version 2..20 6.111.98.5.01.13 en

Alle Rechte vorbehalten All rights reserved Tous droits réservés Reservados todos los derechos Tutti i diritti riservati

© 06 / 2011 Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG, 72336 Balingen Postfach 10 01 64 72301 Balingen/Germany, Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696 e-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.bizerba.com

Translation of original operating instructions

6.111.98.5.01.13

Chapter index About these instructions About the device

1 2

Installation

3 4

Device and operating controls

5

Operation

6

Programming

7

Troubleshooting

8

Maintenance

9

Technical data

10

Subject index

11

Safety instructions

6.111.98.5.01.13

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II

List of contents

List of contents 1

2

3

4

Page

About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1

1.1

Safe-keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1

1.2

Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

1

1.3

Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

2

1.4

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

3

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

1

2.1

Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

1

2.2

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

1

2.3

Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

1

2.4

Designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

2

2.5

Verification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

3

2.6

Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

4

2.7 2.7.1

Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

5 6

2.8

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

7

2.9

Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

7

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

1

3.1

Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

1

3.2

Device signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

1

3.3

Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

2

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

1

4.1

Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

1

4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4

Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check the electric connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of customer's power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of scale network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 1 2 3 3 4 5

4.2.5

6.111.98.5.01.13

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

-

0-1

List of contents

Operating instruction BC II Page

5

6

4.2.6

Rechargeable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Operation with rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Battery icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

6 6 7

4.3 4.3.1

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

8 8

4.4

Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

8

Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

1

5.1

Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

1

5.2 5.2.1

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

2 2

5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 5 5 5 5

-

3 3 4 4 7

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4

Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the thermal print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 5 5 5 5

8 8 - 10 - 11 - 12

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

1

6.1

Switching on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

1

6.2

Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

1

6.3

Zerosetting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

1

6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7

Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price labeling with manual triggering * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price labeling with automatic start * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piece price multi- label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed weight label multi-printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

6.5 6.5.1

Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . 6 -

9 9

6.6

Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

11

6.7

Scroll function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12

6.8

Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

0-2

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

6.111.98.5.01.13


List of contents Page

6.9

Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

6.10

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

6.11 6.11.1 6.11.2

Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . Calling up PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator sales with PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces Register manual weight input ( depending on country) . . . . . . . . .

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

-

14 14 16 16 16 16 17

6.12 6.12.1

Tare functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare balancing for unknown tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unknown tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare balancing for known tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value weighed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call up operator tare saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

-

18 18 18 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 22 23

6.12.2

6.12.3

6.13

Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24

6.14

Talon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25

6.15

Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25

6.16

Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26

6.17 6.17.1 6.17.2 6.17.3

Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the last ticket via the operator key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the ticket via ticket number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overwrite VAT from PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.18

Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29

6.19

By Count article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30

6.20

Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 35

6.21

By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 39

6.22

Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 44

6.23 6.23.1 6.23.2

Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45 Sale with manual input of the traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45 Sale with fixed traceability number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 6 6 6

-

26 27 27 28

0-3

List of contents


7

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

1

7.1

Initial display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

1

7.2

Menu password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

1

7.3

Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

2 2

7.4

Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

3

7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.5.9

Overview of list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU direct keys .................................. Barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD labels ........................................ Logos ............................................... VAT rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 8

7.6

General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

9

7.7

Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14

7.8

Barcode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer code WAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instore code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9

Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29

7.10

Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30 Create By Count piece goods in a PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31

7.11

Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32

7.12

Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

7.13 7.13.1

Overview VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34 Assign VAT to PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35

7.14

Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 36

0-4

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

7 7 7 7

-

15 17 18 23

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.15 7.15.1

7.15.2 7.15.3 7.15.4 7.16 7.16.1 7.16.2 7.16.3 7.16.4 7.16.5

7.16.6

7.16.7

PLU maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create PLU (article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110 . Unit price input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price overwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Article type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU article text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo print in BLD logo fields ............................. By Count: Piece per package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight . . . . . . By Count: Mandatory input of pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count: Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count: Fixed weight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory input of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT can be overwritten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare % (dependent on country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print PLU (article) lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 115 . Delete PLU (article) individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 120 . Delete PLU (article) from - to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 121 .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

39 40 41 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 50 51 51

Data maintenance Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 . Create header and footer notes text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 . Create text of scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202 . Print texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 205 . Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts . . . Pr 206 . Delete supplementary text individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete all supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete scrolling message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 210 . Create barcode format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter code constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select numeric code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and adopt code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administer barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211 .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

52 52 53 54 55 56 56 56 56 57 58 58 59 59 61 62

6.111.98.5.01.13

0-5

List of contents


7.16.8

7.16.9 7.16.10

7.16.11

7.16.12

7.17 7.17.1 7.17.2

7.17.3 7.17.4

7.18 7.18.1

0-6

Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215 . Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . . . . . . . . Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) . . . . . Barcode for non-PLU minus article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Product groups for non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) . . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD label list / print logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr220 . Print BLD label list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete BLD labels / logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 225 . Delete BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete BLD logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 230 . Define VAT rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incl. or excl. VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 . Printing VAT list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same VAT for all articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

64 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 70 70 70 71 71 71 71

Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 . Print reports on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr310 . Scale report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with one product text line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with all article text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line . . . . Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines . . . . VAT sales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print report on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr311 . Display / delete sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr320 . Display sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

72 72 74 74 75 75 76 77 77 78 79 79 80 80 80

Device Configuration Menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr500 . Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 7 7 7 7 7

-

81 81 82 82 82 83

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.18.2 7.18.3

7.18.4

7.18.5

7.18.6

7.18.7

7.18.8 7.18.9 7.18.10 7.18.11

Select type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 505 . Setting main operating mode Pr 510 . Select main operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 511 . Select switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for different operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 515 . Automatic zerosetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open tickets / labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsory entry for By Count pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsory entry for fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrolling message settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 516 . Select scrolling message no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select display location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 . Constant key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print article and total label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator items display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cash functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Payment in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talon print-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print cancellation and canceled articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing included VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print ticket if requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 521 . Settings for price labeling mode * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 525 . Labeling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piece price multiple label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure operator keys with operator no. . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 530 . PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 535 . 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. . . . . . PLU direct key mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU direct key allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay time PLU no. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

- 84 - 84 - 85 - 85 - 85 - 86 - 86 - 86 - 87 - 87 - 87 - 88 - 88 - 88 - 88 - 89 - 89 - 89 - 90 - 90 - 90 - 90 - 91 - 91 - 91 - 92 - 93 - 93 - 94 - 94 - 94 - 94 - 95 - 95 - 95 - 96 - 97 - 97 - 98 - 99 - 99 - 99 - 100 - 100 - 100 - 101 - 102

0-7

List of contents


7.18.12 7.18.13 7.18.14

7.19 7.19.1

0-8

Print out PLU direct keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 536 . Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 540 . Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr545 . Rounding methods for customer total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of article total * .............................. Rounding for By Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 103 7 - 104 7 7 7 7

-

104 105 105 106

Ticket design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 550 . Print barcode on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print tare on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print footer text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print foreign currency supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print rounding supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket . . . . . . . . . Ticket counter printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print amount paid in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print footer logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

107 108 108 108 109 109 109 110 110 111 111 111 112 112 112 113 113

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.20 7.20.1

7.20.2

7.20.3

Label design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555 . Label type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change label distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaged-on and sell-by date on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare printout on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text for sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start of text field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start of data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data field monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print price frame and texts on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label . . . . . . . . Print foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) . . . . . . Alternative text for packaged-on date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text for use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print units on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print speed for label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 556 . Save configuration from Pr 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 560 . Select foreign currency function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select foreign/ second currency display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency calculation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency characters on label for price field . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places in foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

114 115 116 117 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 120 120 120 121 121 122 123 123 123 124 124 126 126 126 126 127 127 128 128 129 129 129 130 130 130 130 131 131 131

0-9

List of contents


7.21 7.21.1

7.21.2 7.21.3 7.21.4 7.21.5 7.21.6 7.21.7

7.21.8

7.21.9 7.21.10 7.21.11

7.21.12 7.21.13 7.21.14 7.21.15 7.21.16 7.21.17

0 - 10

Database configuration menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr600 . DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of current scale IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP: IP address if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected . Host name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leasing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr601 . Print out of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602 . Setting scale number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 603 . Setting department number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr604 . Setting machine ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr605 . Database configuration (memory management) . . . . . . Pr 606 . No. of PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD text fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD logo fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of items (ticket memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . Pr 607 . Scale type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UDP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control display lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 610 . Turn-of f time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr615 . WLAN settings Pr 621 . Activate WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ping on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of WLAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test telegram on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port number of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beeper on/off Pr 622 . Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr625 . Change key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 630 . Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 . RAM clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 666 . Enter password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690 .

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

- 132 - 132 - 133 - 133 - 133 - 133 - 133 - 134 - 134 - 134 - 134 - 135 - 135 - 135 - 135 - 136 - 136 - 137 - 137 - 137 - 137 - 137 - 138 - 138 - 138 - 139 - 140 - 140 - 141 - 141 - 141 - 142 - 143 - 143 - 144 - 144 - 145 - 145 - 146 - 146 - 146 - 146 - 147 - 148 - 149 - 150 - 150

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.21.18

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting . . . . . . . Pr 695 . 7 - 151 Change main currency to second currency (Euro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 151 Convert PLU price into EURO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 151

7.22 7.22.1 7.22.2 7.22.3 7.22.4 7.22.5 7.22.6

7.22.10 7.22.11 7.22.12

Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 . Print boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 . Print fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 702 . Print menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 703 . Print weighing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 704 . Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 . Feed for labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move print format on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct ticket feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change printing intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 . Display load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 . Display program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716 . Main program version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bootloader version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 717 . Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 . Logbook control Pr 730 .

7.23

Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 163

7.22.7 7.22.8 7.22.9

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

-

152 152 152 153 153 154 155 155 155 156 156 156 157 157 158 158 158 158 158 158 158 158 158 158 159 160 160

0 - 11

List of contents


8

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

1

8.1

Fault description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

1

8.2

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -

2

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -

1

9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3

Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning

................................................. device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . products for printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 9 9 9

-

1 1 2 4

9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the weight display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on storing thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket, label and Linerless rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 9 9 9

-

6 6 6 6

10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

1

9

10.1

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

1

10.2

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

2

10.3

Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

2 2

Subject index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -

1

Appendix Declaration of Conformity for BC ll Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2

0 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13


1

About these instructions

1


Read through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on the device to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this device offers. This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device. It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerba technical consultant if necessary. Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the supplied version.

1.1

Safe-keeping

This operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easily accessible for all personnel. If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it.

1.2

Target group

The device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator must be familiar with the contents of this operating manual. Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorized by Bizerba.

6.111.98.5.01.13

1-1


1

1.3


Symbols used

Various symbols are used in these instructions.

Symbol

Meaning Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action. Key symbols prompt you to press this key on

Mod

+

Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while you press the second key.

1

Position numbers in figures.

Text within < > describes a key.

”Display”

Text within ” ” indicates the display text.

Notes _______________________________________________________________________ Observance of these notes is mandatory. _______________________________________________________________________

Information _______________________________________________________________________ This information is provided for greater understanding. _______________________________________________________________________

Menu settings Prerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray. Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures. Menu setting - Pr 110/ 06 -1

Price overwrite permitted

Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1 Pr 110 Program number “110” / 06 Submenu “06” -1 Setting “1”

1-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


1.4


1

Warnings

Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word. Signal word Symbol

Meaning

_______________________________________________________________________ DANGER

Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for personnel! The consequences are: - critical injuries - severe damage to health Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ WARNING

Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening danger for personnel! The consequences can be: - serious injuries - damage to health - serious damage to property Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION

Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening danger for personnel! The consequences can be: - Injuries - Damage to property Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION

Source of danger, improper use! Damage to property can result. Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

1-3



1

1-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


2

Device

2.1

Device types

About the device

2

The BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer. T = Thermal ticket printer E = Label printer BC II 800 T BC II 800 E

Fig. 1: BC II 800 BC II 100 T BC II 100 E

Fig. 2: BC II 100 BC II 200 T BC II 200 E

Fig. 3: BC II 200

2.2

Accessories

We offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact your Bizerba technical consultant for further information.

2.3

Intended use

The BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well as manual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intended use.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-1

About the device

2.4

2


Designation label

Designation label of a verified scale.

BC II 800

Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:

Explanations of the individual labels: 11147xxxxx

Designation label no.

CE 07

CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which the CE certification was applied.

0103

Identification number of the appointed body ”Verification Ma‐ nagement - Stuttgart”

D07-09-014

No. of EC type approval

M BIZERBA

green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification) Manufacturer Note on recommended battery change - the battery in the CPU unit should be replaced by Bizerba Customer Service in the year printed on the label. A defective battery can result in the loss of saved data.

BCII

Type designation (basic type)

Nr./No.

Device No.

Max 6 kg

Maximum load Max

Min 20 g

Minimum load Min

e=2g

Verification value , e

T= - 6 kg

Subtractive tare maximum load T= -

MADE BY BIZERBA

Manufacturer

120-240V 0.2-0.1A 50/60Hz

Electrical data Scale accuracy class III

2-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


2.5

About the device

Verification information

2

Verification information for EC countries The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. This type of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected to an additional device, e.g. cash register or printer. Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer) must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office or by a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cash register) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications with their additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case of extensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevant verification office must be informed. Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for trade operations. Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details are given on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without being reverified. According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for its intended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particular amendments, supplements and additions. Reverification information Reverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory country regulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2 years. Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verification validity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation and commissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007, as the designation is CE 07). Verification information for non-EU countries The statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed.

_______________________________________________________________________ A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of the scale, with the inscription ”Verified by BIZERBA” (first verification by Bizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of the scale according to the legal requirements. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-3

About the device

2.6

2


Standards and guidelines

The equipment fulfils the following requirements: Measuring technology Directive 90/384/EEC

scales guidelines ”nonautomatic scales”

OIML R76-Ed. 2006

Organisation internationale de métrologie légale Nonautomatic weighing instruments

DIN EN 45501

Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales

OIML R60

Metrological regulation for load cells

WELMEC 2.3

Guideline for software testing

Handbook 44

Specifications, tolerances and other technical require‐ ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA)

Publication 14

Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures (USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada)

Electromagnetic compatibility Directive 2004/108/ EC

EMC-guideline

DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10

interference resistance Residential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09

emitted interference Residential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10

Harmonics current

DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Voltage fluctuations and flickers

GB 9254-1998

Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement

Electrical safety Directive 2006/ 95 EC

Low voltage guideline

IEC 60950-1/ 2001

Information technology equipment - Safety

DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11


UL 60950-1/ 2006-07


DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09

Protection types provided by housing (IP code)

2-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


2.7

About the device

Operating conditions

Do not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled.

-

Temperature and air humidity: The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on the device and on page 10 - 2.

-

Installation area A flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must be guaranteed for our equipment. Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales.

-

Align horizontally To ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device is aligned horizontally.

-

Draft Drafts can affect the measurements made by the scales.

-

Air convection Free air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoid inadmissible heating.

-

Supply voltage The permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and see page 10 - 2.

-

Trained personnel: Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks.

-

Written consent for modifications: Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialog between Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware and software required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing.

Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubts regarding the practical application of these conditions. For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-5

2

About the device

2.7.1

2


Power supply

The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following commissions: -

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

-

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

-

Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protective conductor. Interference suppression measures If the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppression measures must be taken on site, e.g.: -

provision of separate mains cable to our equipment.

-

in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or other suppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment.

2-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


2.8

About the device

Warranty

Installation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from our sales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us. We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from: -

Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual.

-

Defective electrical installation by the customer.

-

Structural changes to our equipment.

-

Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps.

-

Incorrect programming and operation.

-

Natural wear and tear..

The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons we have not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts. If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout. This helps to avoid faulty results. Only trained staff may operate the equipment. Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary. Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from the supplied version.

2.9

Disposal of devices/environmental protection

_______________________________________________________________________ Only applies to Germany! _______________________________________________________________________ This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return and disposal of used batteries and accumulators. This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer or its distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intended use. Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which are no longer operated. In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge. If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you are responsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which are provided to the public. Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs.

6.111.98.5.01.13

2-7

2

About the device


2

2-8

6.111.98.5.01.13


3

Safety instructions

Safety instructions

The safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation, cleaning and maintenance procedures.

3.1

3

Requirements on the operating personnel

The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operating procedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions in this Operating Manual. Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information! Carry out regular training! Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry out programming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively in accordance with our operating and programming instructions. Only use equipment for its intended purpose.

3.2

Device signs

Remove the mains plug from the socket

Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket

6.111.98.5.01.13

3-1

Safety instructions

3.3


Sources of risk related to the system

_______________________________________________________________________

3

For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event of recurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury. Always inform the nearest customer service point. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Check before mains connection Before connecting the device, check -

the power supply data on the designation label

-

the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING

Incorrect supply voltage ! Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire. -

Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power supply data do not match the connection values of the scale. The power supply data must be identical.

-

Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION

Voltage at switched-off scale! Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live.

-

Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ WARNING

Opening the device! Electric shock. -

The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerba personnel.

_______________________________________________________________________

3-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


4

Installation

4.1

Transport and storage

Installation

Always transport and store the device in the original packaging

4 4.2

Installation and assembly

Installation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repair may only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or persons authorized by us.

4.2.1

Conditions for the place of installation

The place of installation must fulfil the following conditions. -

Flat installation surface.

-

Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possible installation must be guaranteed for our equipment.

-

The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, and taking account of maintenance aspects.

4.2.2

Assemble the device

Unpacking Open packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging.

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-1

Installation

4.2.3


Leveling

To compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled at the foot screws using a spirit level. _______________________________________________________________________

4

After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled. _______________________________________________________________________ 1

Position the spirit level

2

Foot screws

1 2

Fig. 6: BC II 800

2 1

Fig. 7: BC II 100 Turn the foot screws 2 until the air bubble 3 is located in the center of the spirit level . 1

1

3

Fig. 8: Leveling

4-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


4.2.4

Installation

Check the electric connection

_______________________________________________________________________ WARNING

Incorrect supply voltage! Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire. -

Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power supply data do not match the connection values of the scale. The power supply data must be identical.

-

Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________

Installation of customer's power supply The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following commissions: -

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

-

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

-

Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

_______________________________________________________________________ Check before mains connection Before connecting the device, check -

the power supply data on the designation label

-

the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-3

4

Installation

4.2.5


Cable connections

_______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION

4

Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the device is switched on. Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning. Always switch off the device before inserting or removing the connection cable.

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4 _______________________________________________________________________ 1

EDP (scale network)

2

Cash drawer

1

3

Power cable

2

4

Clip (strain relief)

4

3

Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200 1

EDP (scale network)

2

Cash drawer

3

Power cable

4

Clip (strain relief)

2 1 4 3

Fig. 10: BC II 800

4-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


Installation

Example of scale network Several scales are connected with a switch. Switch

4

Scale1

1

1

Scale 2

1

Scale 3

1

Scale 4

1

Scale 5 1

Scale 6

1

Connection scale (EDP, scale network)

_______________________________________________________________________ During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline “Networks for scales” need to be adhered to. Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-5

Installation

4.2.6


Rechargeable battery

The BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries. _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING

4

Replace the rechargeable battery! Risk of explosion if not replaced properly. -

The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried out by our customer services and/or a company or person assigned by us.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ Charge battery completely before battery operation. Procedure: - Connect mains to scale. - Switch on scale. _______________________________________________________________________ Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scales can be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains. After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged.

Operation with rechargeable batteries Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is not connected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every 3months. If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on (conservation charging). _______________________________________________________________________ If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0_C, the battery cannot be recharged. _______________________________________________________________________ Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. This charging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces if it is permanently operated at an almost discharged state. _______________________________________________________________________ When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed. Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can be operated for a longer period when not connected to the mains power supply. _______________________________________________________________________

4-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


Installation

Battery icon display

1

4

kg

EURO per

EUR

Fig. 11: Display 1 Battery icon

When connected to the mains: --Battery icon not visible. Scales is connected to the mains. The batteries are charged. Arrow flashes slowly Battery is being charged. Arrow flashes very fast The temperature of the battery is less than 0€C. A statement as to the charged state of the battery cannot be made.

When battery operated: Arrow flashes permanently The charging of the battery is OK. Arrow flashes fast Warning, batteries require charging. Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible to continue operations for about 60 minutes. Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec. The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds.

6.111.98.5.01.13

4-7

Installation

4.3


Commissioning

Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance and servicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerba trade consultant.

4 4.3.1

Switch on device

Prerequisite - The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply. -

The scale should not be loaded.

Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.

4.4

Decommissioning

If you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time, -

Switch the scale off.

-

Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections.

-

Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions.

4-8

6.111.98.5.01.13



5


5.1

Main switch

5

2

1

Fig. 12: BC II 1 Main switch on BC II 800 2

Main switch on BC II 100 and 200

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-1


5.2


Display 1 2 3 4

5 kg 7

EURO per 6

EUR 5

Fig. 13: Dot 7 display The display is divided into: 1 Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots) 2

Lit icons

3

Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country)

4

Light symbol for system identification

5

Selling price

6

Unit price

7

Weight value

5.2.1

Display icons

Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states. The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up. = Net display after taring process = Prepack = Battery operation/battery charging control, = Unit price per kg = Unit price per 100g = Fixed unit price = Constant unit price = Operator number after registration = Character for display of total I

= Symbol for single division scale

II

= Symbol for dual division scale = Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display = Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display

5-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


5.3


Keyboard

_______________________________________________________________________ Keyboard designs are country-dependent. _______________________________________________________________________

5 5.3.1

Membrane keyboard

There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils can be inserted if required.

2

Insert-foil 30 keys DEU (Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboard labeling) Insert-foil 54 keys DEU

3

Membrane keyboard 54 keys

4

Membrane keyboard 30 keys

1

4 3

2

1

Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils Example: 3

2

Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key

4

1

Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys.

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-3


5.3.2 1


Keyboard

Keyboard 84 keys

1

5

Fig. 17: Keyboard

5.3.3

Key functions

Fig. 18: Example of keyboard

5-4

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II Key Tab

1


Function - 54

to PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed)

Z

A

19 - 15 1

-

Non-numeric and special characters (function only in menu)

5

Operator 1 to Operator 4

-

) ] 0

T1

T1 - T4

to

St

A

(country-specific version)

Void


Mod

Esc

/

PLU Man

/ (country-specific version)

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-5

Device and operating controls Key


Function

5

F Prepack



Tare


Ctrl

Enter

(country-specific version) (delete)

Clr

(delete) (country-specific version)

5-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


5.3.4


Keyboard options

Menu setting - Pr631 - 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 149

Additional frame with 24 keys

5

Additional frame for 24 PLUs. The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard.

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

2

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame 1 Additional frame 2

Write-on insert

Front-foil with 30 keys Front-foil with 30 PLU keys. The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard.

1 2

Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU 1 Front membrane 2

Write-on insert

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-7


5.4


Printer

Models BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with receipt printer or label printer. The printers operate according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printed on the thermal side.

5

5.4.1

Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200

Printer lid BC II 100/200 open The printer lid arrows 3 .

3 2

is marked on the top with

Hold the printer lid at the positions marked by the 3 arrows. Open the printer lid by pulling it downwards. 2

Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200 close Fold the printer lid upwards.

Side cover BC II 100/ 200 Open Hold the side cover

1

at the fluted grip.

Open the side cover pulling it downwards. close

1

Close the side cover by pulling it upwards. 1

Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200

5-8

6.111.98.5.01.13



Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800

Side cover BC II 800 Open Hold the slide cover at the

1

grips.

1

5

Open the side cover pulling it downwards. close Close the side cover by pulling it upwards.

Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800 Printer lid The printer lid is arrows 3 .

2

marked at the bottom with

Open 2

Take hold of the printer lid 2 at the places marked with the arrows. 3 Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards. 3

Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid close

2

Fold the printer lid down 2 .

Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid

6.111.98.5.01.13

5-9


5.4.2


Opening and closing the thermal print head

Label printer in BC II 100/200 2

open

5

Place one finger underneath the red grip element 1 . Pull the grip element 1 towards you until the thermal print head disengages and folds down. 2 1

close Fig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100 Place your finger on the red grip element 1 . Press the thermal print head 2 upwards against the printer roller and then backwards until the thermal print head engages. Ticket and label printer BC 800 open Place your index finger underneath the red grip element. 1 .

1

Push the grip element 1 upwards until the thermal print head disengages. 2 Fold the thermal print head upwards.

2

Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head close Place your thumb on the red grip element. Push the thermal print head backwards against the printer roller and then downwards until the thermal print head engages. Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head

5 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13


5.4.3


Ticket printer

Ticket printer paper end The paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert a new ticket roll.

5

Insert ticket paper Remove the empty ticket roll from the paper feed. 2

5

6

Insert a new ticket roll into the paper feed. 1 Pay attention to the direction of the ticket paper. Open the thermal print head page 5 - 10.

4

, see

2

1

3 4

Fig. 29: Paper ticket printer Push the ticket paper through the paper chute 6 , until the start of the roll 5 is about 80 mm over the thermal print head. 3 Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Feed the ticket paper past the tear-off edge of the printer lid. Close the printer lid.

6.111.98.5.01.13

5 - 11


5.4.4


Label printer

End of label After printing the last label, insert a new label roll. 1

Insert label roll

5

3

Open the side cover and printer lid, see page 5 - 8. Open the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Remove the label roll from the take-up pin. 3 . Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards.

4

Pull the backing paper off the take-up pin. 1

5

Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of the new label roll. Place the new label roll take-up pin. 3 .

4

on the 2

Insert the backing paper in accordance with the direction of the paper and attach it to the take-up pin. 1 . The Backing paper must be positioned on collar. 2

6

Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards.

Fig. 30: BC II 100 Label printer Turn the take-up pin 1 manually until the first label is peeled off. Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Close the side cover and printer lid, see page 5 - 8.

5 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13


Device and operating controls 1

Paper label printer 1

11 10

Take-up arbor for backing paper

2

Collar

3

Holding arbor

4

Label roll

5

Deflection pin with red adjustable ring

6

Thermal strip

7

Printer roller

8

Label detachment shaft

9

Deflection pin

10

Transport roller

11

Deflection roller with adjustable ring

2

9 8

3

7 6

4

5

Abb. 31: Paper track in label printer / BCII800 1 1

Take-up arbor for backing paper

2

Collar

3

Holding arbor

4

Label roll

5

Deflection pin with red adjustable ring

6

Thermal strip

7

Printer roller

8

Label detachment shaft

9

Deflection pin

10

10

2

3

9 8

5 7

4

6

Transport roller Abb. 32: Paper track in label printer / BCII100/200

Set width of paper Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to the deflection roller by pushing it to the size of the label. This is necessary for each paper change and when changing the paper width.

5

Fig. 33: Adjustable ring

6.111.98.5.01.13

5 - 13

5



5

5 - 14

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

6

Operation

6.1

Switching on device

The mains switch

is located

-

on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200

-

on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800.

6

The scale should not be loaded. Press mains switch . ”Boot” appears in the display. The display test occurs automatically. All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec.. The weight value display is then automatically set to zero ”0.000” with the scale unloaded and is ready for weighing.

6.2

Switch off device Press mains switch . The display goes dark after a short time.

6.3

Zerosetting device

After switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero ”0.000” kg provided that the scale is unloaded. The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes are compensated automatically. The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scale unloaded. ) ] 0

Press . The weight value display indicates ”0,000” kg.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-1

Operation

6.4


Operating options

Operating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions. Different operating types can be set in the device: 1. Multi-operating mode

6

see page

6-2

2. Self-service operation

see page 6 - 3

3. Quick-service operation

see page 6 - 4

4. Price labeling with manual triggering *

see page 6 - 5

5. Price labeling with automatic start *

see page 6 - 6

6.4.1

Multiple-operator mode

Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time. Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 - Pr 510/ 02 - Pr 505 - Setting Pr 520

Setting multi-operator mode Setting ticket or label layout Set type of paper submenu 01 to 08

General operating procedure Place the article on the scale. Input price ! @

2

Press PLU direct key, e.g. .

or Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98 PLU registration 1

Press operator key e.g.. Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed. Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed. Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02.

Conclude sale Press . 1

Press the operator key, e.g. .

Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket. Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02, see page7 - 92. 6-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.4.2

Operation

Self-service mode

_______________________________________________________________________ The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key. -

Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored can be called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot be called up - you hear an acoustic signal.

- Reports cannot be created in this operating mode. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu setting - Pr 505 - Pr 510/ 01 -01 - Pr 510/ 02 1

Setting label paper Setting self-service mode Setting label layout

Operating procedure: Place the article on the scale. Print article ! @

2

Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. . The label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-3

6

Operation

6.4.3


Quick-service mode

Register with operator key Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr521 -0

Setting self-service mode Setting label layout Recording with operator key

Operating procedure:

6

Place the article on the scale. Call up article ! @

2

Press the PLU direct key e.g. .

Register article and print 1

Press operator key . The label is printed.

or

(dependent on country) Press . The label is printed.

Register automatically Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 521 -1

Setting self-service mode Setting label layout register automatically

Operating procedure: Place the article on the scale. Call up article, then register and print ! @

2

Press the PLU direct key e.g. . It is registered to Operator 1. The label is printed.

6-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.4.4

Operation

Price labeling with manual triggering *

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 525/ 01

Price labeling with release by hand Label layout Setting labeling mode

Call up article

6

Place the article on the scale. ! @

2

Press the PLU direct key e.g. . The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label 1

Press operator key e.g.. The label is printed. Remove the article from the scale. Place the next article on the scale.

1

Press operator key e.g.. You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called up, or until the key is pressed.

Create batch sum label * Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1

with addition

Press . The batch sum label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6-5

Operation

6.4.5


Price labeling with automatic start *

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -05 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 525/ 01

6

Price labeling with automatic release Label layout Setting labeling mode

Call up article Place the article on the scale. ''

3

Press the PLU direct key e.g. . The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label 1

Press operator key e.g.. The label is printed. Remove the article from the scale. Place the article on the scale. The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight. You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called up, or until the key is pressed.

Create batch sum label * Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1

with addition

Press . The batch sum label is printed.

6-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.4.6

Operation

Piece price multi- label printing

A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode. Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 - Pr525/ 02 -00-99

Price labeling Time in sec. between printing of two labels

General operating procedure Input price. $

4

6 Press the PLU direct key for unit price e.g. . The constant function

1

K

is activated.

1,50

1

Define number of labels K

Press .

K

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

00

1,50

15

1,50

14

1,50

00

1,50

0, 00

0,00

PLU registration 1

Press operator key e.g..

K

The labels are printed. The number of labels being printed is continually displayed.

K

End Press .

6.111.98.5.01.13

0,000

K

6-7

Operation

6.4.7


Fixed weight label multi-printing

A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode. Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 - Pr525/ 02 -00-99

Price labeling Time in sec. between printing of two labels

General operating procedure

6

$

Press the PLU direct key for fixed

4

weight e.g. . The constant function

1

is activated.

1

0,500

K

12, 00

6,00

Define number of labels +

Press and hold . Then press

K

K

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

__ 15

Press The number of labels is herewith confirmed. PLU registration 1

Press operator key e.g.. The labels are printed.

0,500

K

12, 00

6,00

End Press .

6-8

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.5

Operation

Unit price input via 10-key keypad

_______________________________________________________________________ With key

you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no.

Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535. _______________________________________________________________________

6.5.1

Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

6

Unit price input Price/kg Place article on the scale.

0,556

0,00

0,00

0,556

8,56

4,76

Enter the unit price. Read off the selling price. 1

Register e.g. on operator . The selling price is saved to the buffer.

Price per piece manual input

Non-weighed 0,00

Press . Enter the price per piece,

Non-weighed 8,65

e.g. 8.65 1

Register e.g. on operator .

Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed

0,000

0,00

Non-weighed 0,00

Press . Enter the price per piece, e.g. 8.65

[1]

0,00

Non-weighed 8,65 Non-weighed

Press .

_0

8,65

_5

8,65

0,00

0,00

Non-weighed Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. 1


6.111.98.5.01.13

0,000

[1]

6-9

Operation


Entry of minus amount -

Minus 0,00

Press . Enter the price per piece,

Minus - 1,00

e.g. 1.00 1


6

Multiplication of minus amount input -

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

Minus 0,00

Press Minus Enter the price per piece, e.g. 1.00

- 1,00 Minus

Press .

_0

- 1,00

_5

- 1,00

Minus Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. 1


6 - 10

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.6

Operation

Cancellation

If the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled. Cancel lastly sold article Op. Pcs 1

[1]

Press .

0,00


[1]

8,60

The last items are displayed. St

Press . The displayed items are canceled.

0,000

0,00

[1]

0,00

Search for article by ”Scrolling” and cancelling Several articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled. St 1

Press . Press operator key e.g.. The last items are displayed. Scroll until the article you want appears on the display.

St

Press . The displayed items are canceled.

Quit cancellation You start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation. Pcs 1

Press .

Op.

Press operator key e.g.. The last items are displayed. Press .

0,000 0,00 You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered.

6.111.98.5.01.13

[1]

0,00 [1]

8,60 [1]

0,00

6 - 11

6

Operation

6.7


Scroll function

After selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked in the display by Pcs 1

Press . Press operator key e.g.. The last items are displayed.

6

upwards. The items are displayed in descending order. Press . The scroll function is closed.

6 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.8

Operation

Constant

Fix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales of the same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01. PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr 520/ 01. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 01

Constant key function

Switch on fixing. The symbol Switch off fixing. The symbol

6.9

6 illuminates before before

or

or

(dependent on country).

goes out (depending on country)

Subtotal

The subtotal can be displayed (but not deleted) after the sale of one or more articles. Op. [1] Press . 0,00 1


Total

[1]

8,60

The subtotal is displayed.

6.10

Total

The final total occurs after the sale of one or more articles. Op.

[1]

Press . 1


0,00 Total

The total is displayed. The registered items and the total are printed. The buffer for operator 1 is cleared.

6.111.98.5.01.13

*

[1]

8,60

6 - 13

Operation


6.11

Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU)

6.11.1

Calling up PLUs

Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14

PLU articles are created

The PLU call can be implemented by two methods:

6

-

Press the PLU direct key. PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.

PLU direct key Stored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys. Tab


1

The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display.

Second level of PLU direct keys With twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard. Tab

+ 1

Press and hold and then press PLU direct key, e.g. . The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display.

Example 1: There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing + PLU 51 is accessed. Example 2: 30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing + PLU 31 is accessed.

6 - 14

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

PLU input with ten-digit keyboard The input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU1: Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -0 - Pr 535/ 02

Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure Press ,

PLU

___

PLU

__1

6

and PLU number on the 10-key keypad, e.g. <1>. Confirm with .

Calf liver paté 0.002 -0,002 12,55 _______________________________________________________________________ PLU 1 is displayed.

Operating procedure - If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with . The PLU is displayed immediately. - If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time delay. This must not be confirmed with . _______________________________________________________________________

or Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -1 - Pr 535/ 02

Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure Press the PLU number on the ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>. Confirm with . PLU 1 is displayed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

PLU

___ ___1

Calf liver paté -0,002 12,55

0.002

6 - 15

Operation

6.11.2


Operator sales with PLU

Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. Place the article on the scale. Tab

1


1

Register, e.g. on operator 1 .

6 ”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up the saved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may be changed. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1

Price overwriting permissible

Place the article on the scale. Tab

1

Press the PLU direct key e.g. . Press , Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30

1

Register, e.g. on operator 1 .

Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces Press a PLU direct key with stored article type is ”Non-weighed” or ”Minus”, e.g. .

1

1,50

Press .

Smoked sausage 0

1,50

Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 22.

Smoked sausage 22

1,50

0,000

0,00

Register e.g. on operator 1 .

6 - 16

Smoked sausage

0,00

[1]

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

Register manual weight input ( depending on country) Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Setting into operation see page 7 - 30 Press a PLU direct key with stored PLU type is ”Non-weighed” or ”Minus”, e.g. . Press .

Smoked sausage 0,118 3,49

0,40

6


0,00


0,76

0,000

0,00

Enter the known weight, e.g. 0.220kg. Press Entry confirmed, selling price is displayed. 1

Register e.g. on operator 1 .

6.111.98.5.01.13

0,00

[1]

6 - 17

Operation


6.12

Tare functions

6.12.1

Tare balancing for unknown tare values

_______________________________________________________________________ An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which is to be weighed and tared.

6

-

For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighing range can be tared.

-

For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg (max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent).

-

The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range.

-

The tare command is only directly executed when the weight display is stationary.

-

If an unknown tare was tared with key , it cannot be overwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare).

-

After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLU tare, but the PLU tare is ignored.

_______________________________________________________________________

Unknown tare Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight. Place the empty container on the scale. The weight display 1 indicates the weight of the empty container e.g.: ”0,535” kg.

0,535

0,00

0,00

0,00

0,535 0,00

Press . The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. The weight display 1 indicates zero.

0,000

NET

Fill the empty container with the article. The weight display 1 indicates the net weight of the article ”2,000” kg. The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg.

6 - 18

2

1

2,000 1

0,535 0,00

0,00 2

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

Batch tare (country-related) Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the next article net. Place the empty container on the scale. The weight display 1 indicates the weight of the empty container, e.g.: ”0,535” kg.

0,535

0,00

0,00

0,00

0,535 0,00

1

Press . The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. The weight display 1 indicates zero.

Fill the empty container with the article. The weight display 1 indicates the net weight of the article ”0.800” kg. The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. Press . Weight of article and of empty container are added to the new tare weight 2 . The weight display 1 indicates zero.

0,000

2

1

NET

0,800

0,00 2

1

NET

0,000 1

0,535 0,00

1,353 0,00

0,00 2

For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entire weighing range.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 19

6

Operation

6.12.2


Tare balancing for known tare values

_______________________________________________________________________ Known tare -

When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known (packaging/product-related tare).

-

For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be located within the smallest division range (country-dependent).

-

A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown (weighed) tare.

-

The known tare can be input by 2 methods: 1. Manual tare 2. Tare with PLU tare

6

_______________________________________________________________________

Manual tare (country-related) _______________________________________________________________________ Manual taring is not allowed in various countries. _______________________________________________________________________ Prerequisite - The scale should not be loaded. Weight value ”0,000” kg.

0,00

_,___ 0,00

0,00

_,_52 0,00

0,00

0,052 0,00

Press . The manual tare input is opened.

0,000

Enter the known tare value, e.g. 0,052 kg.

0,000

Press . The input tare value is accepted. The display shows the tare 2 value and the net weight value 1 .

NET

-0,052 1

6 - 20

2

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

PLU tare Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article. Menu setting - Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 Enter article-related tare values The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call. Tab

1

Press e.g. .

Calf liver paté NET -0,002 0,00

0.002 0,00

Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 Menu setting - Pr 540

T1

Allocate known tare values to the tare keys

Press e.g. . The saved tare value is displayed.

NET

-0,004

0,00

0,004 0,00

Tare clearing 1. Manual Unload the scale. Press . The display indicates zero.

2. Automatically

1

Register article, e.g. on operator 1 . Unload the scale. The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 21

6

Operation

6.12.3


Operator tare

An operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called up any time. Prerequisite - Pr 630 - Pr 630

Key must exist. Key must exist.

Save tare value weighed

6

Save tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. . Operating procedure:

F12

Place empty container on scale.

0,060

0,00

0,00

.

Op. 0,060

0,00

0,00

0,000

0,00

-0,060

0,00

0,060 0,00 0,060 0,00

0,000

0,00

0,00

.

Op. 0,000

0,00

0,00

Press operator key.

Op. 0,000

0,00

-,- - 0,00

0,00

0,070 0,00

-0,070

0,00

0,070 0,00

0,000

0,00

0,00

Press operator key.

1

Tare value is displayed. Remove empty container from scale. Press Tare key . The tare display is deleted. The tare value is saved under operator key .

Save tare value entered F13

1

The input field is displayed. Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg. Press tare key .

Oper. 0,000

Press tare key . The tare display is deleted. The tare value is saved under operator key .

6 - 22

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation

Call up operator tare saved Scale is unloaded and in untared condition. F13

Press. ”Oper.” is displayed.

1

Op. 0,000

0,00

0,00

0,00

0,070 0,00

Press operator key. The saved tare value is displayed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

-0,070

6 - 23

6

Operation

6.13


Assisted sales with ticket

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode - Pr 510/ 02 -0 Ticket layout Set the ticket paper at the label printer - Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper

6

Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the last article sold and concludes the sale with the total. Apply article on scale Tab

1

Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key e.g. .

1

Register article on

1

. 1

Remove product from the scale. 2 ! @

2

Call up next article (hand), e.g. .

3

1

Register article on

3

Call up next article (minus),

''

2

. 4

e.g. . 1

Register article on

3

. Fig. 34: Print example

St

Open cancellation function.

1

Press operator key

St

Confirm cancellation Last item is canceled 4 .

Open total printing. 1

Press operator key.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example.

6 - 24

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.14

Operation

Talon

The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator check everything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay of between 1 and 99 seconds can occur. The delay can be interrupted by pressing the key. The talon is then printed immediately. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing 1

Ticket counter

2

Operator number

3

Total

4

No. of items

6 1

2

4

3

Fig. 35: Talon example

6.15

Print ticket upon request

In multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished, if requested. If the key combination and is not pressed, the total occurs only in the display. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 11 -0

Print ticket only upon request

Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request Apply article on scale Tab

1

Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key e.g. .

1

0.002 6,25

Register article on . Press

1

Calf liver paté NET 0,498 12,55

Total

Press operator key.

6,25

The total is displayed. On request: + 1

Shift and press then operator key . The ticket is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 25

Operation

6.16


Repeat ticket

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 07 -1

with -Repeat ticket-

The complete and printed ticket can be printed again. Prerequisite - Ticket completion with and operator key e.g. .

6

2

+ 1

1

Press and hold . Then press operator key 1 A copy is printed. You can tell the copy from the original by the asterisk 1 after the ticket number 2 .

Fig. 36: Repeat ticket

6.17

Open ticket again

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 08 -1

with -Re-open ticket-

If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can be re-opened. There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again. -

Open the last ticket via the operator key. Open a ticket via the ticket number

6 - 26

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.17.1

Operation

Open the last ticket via the operator key.

Prerequisite - Ticket completion with and operator key e.g. . Open the last ticket: Ctrl

+

Press and hold . Then ____

press .

6

Press operator key e.g.

1

OP1<.>

[1]

0,000

0,00

0,00

The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold. Finalize the re-opened ticket: Press . Press .

1

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

6.17.2

Open the ticket via ticket number

Open ticket again: Ctrl

+

Press and hold . Then press .

____

Enter the ticket number<8>

___8

press

[1]

0,000 0,00 0,00 Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display. Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number. Finalize the re-opened ticket: Press . 1

Press e.g..

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 27

Operation

6.17.3


Overwrite VAT from PLU

A VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned to the PLU with the VAT key. Prerequisite - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5. - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten. - Pr630 The VAT key can be found on the keyboard. - Pr631/ 03 re-programmed keyboard is set

6

Operating procedure: Apply article on scale Tab

1

Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. with VAT number 1 (19%)

II

Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%)

1

Register article on . Article is registered with 7% VAT Press

1

Press operator key.

The ticket is printed. After VAT from PLU is assigned to article.

6 - 28

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.18

Operation

Serviced selling with label layout

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 - Pr 510/ 02 - Pr 510/ 03 - Pr 520/ 02

-01 -1 -1 -2

Multi-operator mode Label layout with addition of customer total Only print article label

Example: Operator sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, and cancels the article last sold. Place article on the scale. Tab

Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key

1

e.g. . Register article on .

1

The label is printed immediately. Remove article from the scale.

! @

Call up next article (hand),

2

e.g. . Register article on .

1

The label is printed immediately.

''

3

Call up next article (minus), e.g. .

1

Register article on . The label is printed immediately.

St

Open cancellation function.

1

Press operator key. Cancel

St

Last item is canceled. No label is printed for a cancellation.

Display total 1

Press and operator e.g. in sequence. The total is displayed. No total label is printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 29

6

Operation


By-Count

6.19

By Count article

_______________________________________________________________________ The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page 7 - 30. _______________________________________________________________________ Sell By Count article

6

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -3 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1

Unit price input (price per package) By Count article type Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label)

Operating procedure $

4

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g. .

1

Press operator key.

Smoked sausage 3

1,50

The label with the package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket.

2

1

Fig. 37: By Count label (1)

6 - 30

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation By-Count

By Count with mandatory input of number of pieces The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - Pr 110/ 16 -1

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) with mandatory input

6 Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces $ Smoked sausage Call up by-count article via PLU direct key 4 3 e.g. . Input of number of pieces is required Quantity 3

1,50

1,50

Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5> The new number of pieces per package and the calculated package price are displayed. 1

Quantity 5

2,50

Press operator key. The label with the new package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2

1


6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 31

Operation


By-Count By Count with overwriting of package price The set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1

6

Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) Price overwrite permitted

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price $

4

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g. . Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.5.00

1

Smoked sausage 3

1,50

Smoked sausage 3

0,00

Smoked sausage 3

5,00

Press operator key. The label with the new package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2

1


6 - 32

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation By-Count

By Count with overwriting of package price and number of pieces The stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The stored number of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price per piece are recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1


6

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces $

Call up by-count article via PLU

4

direct key e.g. . Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.<5.00>

Smoked sausage 3

1,50

Smoked sausage 3

0,00

Smoked sausage 3

5,00

Smoked sausage 0

5,00

Smoked sausage 5

8,33

Press key The number of pieces is set to ”0” Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The new number of pieces and the calculated package price are displayed. 1

Press operator key. The label with the calculated package price 1 and the calculated price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket.

2 1


6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 33

Operation


By-Count By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package price The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the package price. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1


6 Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price $

4

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g. .

Smoked sausage 3

1,50

Smoked sausage 0

1,50

Smoked sausage 5

2,50

Smoked sausage 5

0,00

Smoked sausage 5

0,75

Press key The number of pieces is set to ”0”. Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The package price changes. Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.<0.75> 1

Press operator key. The label with the entered final package price 1 and the calculated price per piece is printed. 2 The price per piece is not printed on the ticket.

2

1


6 - 34

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation Fixed weight

6.20

Fixed weight

The stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighed weight. _______________________________________________________________________ The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the By Count article type, see page 7 - 30. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17

6

Unit price input (price per fixed weight) Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

Operating procedure F

22

Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key e.g. .

1

Tin of sausage 0,125 2,20

Press operator key. The ticket with selling price fixed weight is printed. 2

1

0,28

and

2 1

Fig. 42: Fixed weight (1) Fixed weight with mandatory input The fixed weight must always be entered in the sale. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1

6.111.98.5.01.13

Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib with mandatory input of fixed weight

6 - 35

Operation


Fixed weight Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight F

22

Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key e.g..

6

Tin of sausage 0,125 220

Fixed weight input is required.

Fixed weight 0,000

Enter new fixed weights,

Fixed weight 0,150

e.g<0150>.

0,28

Press key. The new fixed weight and the calculated selling price are displayed.

1


0,33

Press operator key. The new fixed weight 1 and the selling price 2 are printed.

1

2

Fig. 43: Fixed weight (2)

Fixed weight with overwriting of unit price The stored unit price can be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1

6 - 36

Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) Price overwriting permissible

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation Fixed weight

Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwrite The selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight. F

Call up fixed weight article via

22

PLU direct key e.g..

Press The price is set to ”0.00”. Enter new unit price, e.g.<200>.


0,28


0,00


0,25

Press operator key.

1

The new unit price 2 and the calculated selling price 1 are printed.

2

1


Change fixed weight Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17

6.111.98.5.01.13

Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

6 - 37

6

Operation


Fixed weight Operating procedure for changing fixed weight F

22

Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key e.g..


0,28

Press . The selling price disappears and the fixed weight is set to ”0.000”.

6

Enter new fixed weight, e.g<0150>.



1,10

The calculated selling price is displayed. 1

Press operator key. The new fixed weight 1 and the calculated selling price 2 are printed.

1

2


6 - 38

6.111.98.5.01.13


Operation By Count fixed weight

6.21

By Count fixed weight

In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight. Sell By Count fixed weight article Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5 By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and price refer to pieces per package) - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

6

Operating procedure D

21

Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. .

1


2,10

Press operator key. 1

Fixed weight are printed.

1

and selling price

2

2

Fig. 46: By Count fixed weight (1)

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 39

Operation


By Count fixed weight By Count fixed weight with mandatory input The stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 19-1

Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight article type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) with mandatory input of fixed weight

6 Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input D

21

Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. . Fixed weight input is required.


2,10

Fixed weight 0,000

Enter new fixed weight, e.g<0500> g. Fixed weight 0,500

Press key. The selling price remains the same. The price per kg changes but is not displayed.

1


2,10

Press operator key. 2

The altered price per kg 1 and the new fixed weight 2 are printed.

1


6 - 40

6.111.98.5.01.13



Change number of pieces Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17

Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

6

Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces D

Call By Count fixed weight article

21

via PLU direct key, e.g. .


2,10


2,10


3,50

Press . The number of pieces is set to ”0”.

Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The calculated selling price and the new fixed weight are displayed immediately. Press operator key.

1

1

The new fixed weight 1 and the calculated selling price 2 are printed.

2


6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 41

Operation


By Count fixed weight By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of pieces The stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 16-1

Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) with mandatory input of number of pieces

6 Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces D

21

Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. . Input of number of pieces is required


2,10

Number of pieces 0,250 3

2,10

Number of pieces 0,583 7

4,90

Enter number of pieces, e.g<7> The calculated selling price and the new fixed weight are displayed immediately. 1

Press operator key. The new package price 1 and the number of pieces 2 are printed.

2

1


6 - 42

6.111.98.5.01.13



By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package price The set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 06 -1

Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight article type Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) Price overwrite permissible

6

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price D

Call By Count fixed weight article

21

via PLU direct key, e.g. .


2,10


0,00


5,00

Press The package price is set to ”0.00”. Enter new package price e.g.<500> Press operator key.

1

The new package price 1 and the new kg price 2 are printed.

2

1


6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 43

Operation

6.22


Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 04 - Pr 520/ 05 - Pr 550/ 12 -1

Cash register function Payment in/out Print out amount paid in/due on ticket

Operating procedure Record the article.

6

Press .

Op.

[1]

0,00 1

Press the operator key, e.g. .

Total

*

[1]

2,71

The customer pays the exact amount If exact amount, close sales with total key.

Payment out

*

[1]

0,00

The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens.

Customer pays, for example with 5.00 € Enter the amount.

Payment in

*

[1]

5,00

Delete the incorrect entry with and enter the amount again. Payment out [1] * Save input. 2,29 The ticket is printed, the cash drawer opens and the change is indicated.

6 - 44

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.23

Operation

Product with data of origin

When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information on origin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with a traceability number, which is entered when sold. Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and price labeling. The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability data sales report.

6

There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin: -

Input traceability no. manually. Use defined traceability no.

6.23.1

Sale with manual input of the traceability number

Prerequisite Traceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10. PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 - Pr 515/ 03 - 1

with traceability number Input traceability no. manually

Operating procedure Place the beef, for example, on the scales. Tab

1

Press the PLU direct key e.g. (beef). If the product contains traceability data, the weight, unit price and selling price are only displayed briefly.

0,206

A prompt to input the abbreviated traceability number then appears.

12,55

2,59

12,55

2,59

__

Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02.

02

Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902. Confirm the entry. The weight, unit price and selling are are displayed again. 1

0,206

Registerfor example at Operator 1 .

6.111.98.5.01.13

6 - 45

Operation

6.23.2


Sale with fixed traceability number.

Prerequisite A traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10. PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.

6

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 - Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99 - Pr 515/ 03 - 2

with traceability number Define traceability number Use defined traceability no.

All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from the set traceability number. Operating procedure Place the beef, for example, on the scales. Tab

1

Press the PLU direct key e.g. (beef). If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number is automatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. The traceability numbers is not displayed.

1

Registerfor example at Operator 1 . The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report.

6 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13


7

Programming

Programming

Menus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all country versions.

7.1

Initial display

If the display is assigned, press . 1

Net weight display

2

Unit price display

3

Selling price display

1

2

0,000

0,00

kg T kg

Price/kg

3

7

0,00 Price

Fig. 51: Initial display

7.2

Menu password

No password The device is supplied without a password. Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password. PASS ______

With password Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page 7 - 150. Once the password input has been activated, a correct password has to be entered. The password consists of 6 figures.

PASS

An symbol appears in the display for each figure that is entered. If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-1

Programming

7.3


Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu

Menu call-up is executed from the scales' output display. General programming sequence

7

1.

Menu call-up Press the key.

2.

Menu selection Enter the program number via the 10-key keypad.

3.

Submenu selection Enter the submenu number and confirm with the key.

4.

Make settings Confirm settings with key.

5.

Exit menu Press the key.

Example: Menu call-up

Pr Call up menu

Menu selection Select menu

Pr115 01

Submenu selection Select submenu, e.g. 2 print PLU list

Pr115 _2

confirm Make settings Enter the start to the range,

Pr115 02 ____11-999999

e.g. PLU no.11 confirm Enter the end of the range,

Pr115 02 000011-____25

e.g. PLU no.25 confirm The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed. Exit menu Exit menu. The scale returns to the initial display.

7-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming

Input correction Error inputs can be undone by pressing key . Press key to go to previous level, the old values remain intact. Key to clear entry. Esc

Use key to go to previous level.

_______________________________________________________________________ If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is not possible to switch to the programming mode. The operator accounts have to be closed. _______________________________________________________________________

7.4

Initial scale setting

Set the type of paper to be used.

Pr

Call up menu Pr505 Select menu

1 Pr505

Select type of paper

0= Ticket paper 1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

0

confirm

Set the desired main operating mode. Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510, see page 7 - 84 and 7 - 107. e.g. setting multi-operating mode and ticket layout Design ticket

Pr510/01 -01 Pr 510/ 02-0 Pr 550, see page 7 - 107

Set the required switching operation mode. Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511, see page 7 - 86 and 7 - 114. e.g. setting multi-operating mode and label layout Design label

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr511/01 -01 Pr 511/ 02-1 Pr 555, see page 7 - 114

7-3

7

Programming

7.5


Overview of list

Prerequisite - Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer. - Pr 505 -0 Select ticket paper

7.5.1

PLU article print, see Pr 115, page 7 - 50 Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 39

7

1

Scale number

2

Unit price

3

Tare

4 5

Article with data of origin Price overwriting permissible

6

PLU text

7

Shelf-life days

8

Barcode

9

Product group number

10

PLU number / article number

11

Date and time

11

1

10

2

9

3

8 7

4 6

5

Fig. 52: Article list

7.5.2

Header and footer texts print, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 55 Create see Pr 201, on page7 - 53

1

Scale number

2

Enter header or footer text

3

Text number

4

Date and time

4

1

3 2

Fig. 53: Header and footer text list

7-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


7.5.3

Programming

Additional texts see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 55 Create see Pr 200, on page7 - 52

1

Scale number

2

Supplement. text

3

Text number

4

Date and time

4

3

7 2 1 Fig. 54: Suppl. text list

7.5.4

Scrolling message Print, see Pr 205/ 03 Create see Pr 202,

1

Scale no

2

Scrolling message text

3

Scrolling message number

4

Date and time

page 7 - 55 on page7 - 54 4

3

2

1

Fig. 55: Scrolling message list

7.5.5

PLU direct keys

1

print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 103 change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 100 PLU number (article no.)

2

PLU direct key

2

1

Fig. 56: PLU direct keys

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-5

Programming

7.5.6

Barcode structure , see Pr 211, Create see Pr 210,

7


1

Structure number

2

Barcode format

3

Field 1 code constant

4 5

Content field 1 Field 2 part string from PLU

6

No. of digits for field 2

7

Field 3 price

8


9

Conversion of variable values

page7 - 62 on page7 - 58

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9

Fig. 57: Barcode structures

7.5.7

BLD labels

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer. Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts. Printout of BLD label numbers. Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 68 Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 68. Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 115.

1

Scale number

2

Label name (enter in BLD)

3

Label name (enter in BLD)

4

Date and time

4

3

2

1

Fig. 58: Example of BLD label list

7-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


7.5.8

Programming

Logos

Printout of logo saved in the scales. _______________________________________________________________________ Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given a number and sent to the scales where they are stored. If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo is replaced by the BLD logo. If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logo stored under this number is available again. _______________________________________________________________________ Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 68 Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 69

1

Scale number

2

Logo name

3

Logo

4

Logo ID Date and time

5

5

1

4 2 3

Fig. 59: Example of logo list

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-7

7

Programming

7.5.9


VAT rates

Printing saved VAT rates. Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 71 Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 71 Create see Pr 230, on page7 - 69

7

1

VAT number

2

VAT rate

3

VAT text

4

Including or excluding VAT

1 2

3

7-8

4

6.111.98.5.01.13


7.6

Programming

General procedure for text input

Texts are entered in the program menus: Pr 200 supplementary text, -

Pr 201 header and footer texts

-

PR 202 scrolling message

-

Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts

1

Font type

2

Line number (line 1)

3

Available memory space (in byte)

Pr200 C 1500 LI H3

2

7

1

Fig. 60: Example of display Font H HThe font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label) H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15). Change font Clr +

1

Press and hold . Then press <0>.

Enter the font, e.g.15

Press key.

l H1

_15_

^15;I C 1496

The font is now Script 15. Also for the following lines

L1

H 15

_______________________________________________________________________ The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in the next line. The last font set applies until the next change. _______________________________________________________________________ The overview of font types (script) in the scale can be printed out via Pr 702.

Fig. 61: Font 4-9

6.111.98.5.01.13

7-9

Programming

Change line CR


2

Press key for the next

45

Pr200 C 1499 L2 H15

line. Change up and down between existing lines. Save entry Pr200 Press key.

C 1499 L2 H15

7 Keys with alpha and special characters Lower case is generally selected by pressing the key. Character a: A

Press key<19>.

19

Character A: A

+ 19

Press and hold key , then press key <19>.

If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows: Character ß: ß?

Press key<39>.

39

Character ?: Ctrl

ß?

+ 39

Press and hold key . then press key<39>.

7 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming

Special character: Example of decimal input of unicode characters. Character I:

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-

Ctrl

+

Press and hold . then press <4>.

l UCd

_____

UCd

__8364

Press the decimal figures for the unicode for the desired character.

l

7

|

Confirm with .

C 1498 LI H-

Enter example of hex value input. Character I:

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-

Ctrl

+

Press and hold . then press <2>. A

C

19 30

6.111.98.5.01.13

l UCH

____

requested character.

UCH

_20Ac

Confirm with .

|

Enter the hex value for the

l

C 1498 LI H-

7 - 11

Programming


CTRL Sequences in the editor

7 1

Shortcuts

Function

CTRL + 0

Change font

CTRL + 1

Activate and deactivate Pinyin mode Only for Chinese program and dot seven display. 1

CTRL + 2

Enter Unicode hexadecimal number

CTRL + 3

GB 3212 mode Only for Chinese program

CTRL + 4

Enter Unicode decimal number

In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Z is selected in the Editor.

7 - 12

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming

Function keys of text input delete final character

Delete line

8

Move cursor in text to the left or right

9

7

Control printout of current text line

Control printout of all text lines

Text example Enter article text, e.g.: Raclètte cheese R

+ 13

R

A

C

L

19

30

27

Ctrl

+

acl

è

T

T

E

14

14

12

SP

tte

Space

44 K

+ 26 E

Ä

S

41

20 12

K

Cheese

Control printout: Raclètte cheese

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 13

Programming

7.7


Overview of scrolling messages

Define scrolling message text Define in Pr 202

Pr202 01

Select 202 Scrolling message for text number input

Pr202 02

01-99 l

7

Press key.

C 500 LI H-

Scrolling message for text input, e.g. ”&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Müller” For text input, see page 7 - 9. Control characters: &Z;= Display character-by-character -

&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

-

&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

-

&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

_______________________________________________________________________ To control the text, the control characters must be entered in front of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. The control characters can be entered at any point between the text. _______________________________________________________________________

Scrolling message Menu setting - Pr 516/ 01 -01

Select scrolling text number.

-

Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operator

-

-

Pr 516/ 02 -2 and customer side or Pr 516/ 02 -1 side or Pr 516/ 02 -0 customer side Pr 516/ 03 -1

7 - 14

Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operator

Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message on Scrolling message starts with empty display

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Barcode

7.8

Barcode overview

Procedure: 1.

Create barcode structure -

Pr 210 Enter structure number Pr 210/01 Define barcode format (EAN 13 or code 128) Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant

- Pr 210/03 Define numeric value _______________________________________________________________________ If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr 210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only press numeric key <3> and confirm with . _______________________________________________________________________ -

Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value Pr210/ 04 Save structure

Example Structure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) are entered. Further operating procedure for numeric value input: Pr210 03 01040 Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 01040 (price) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm submenu 03

Submenu 4 is displayed Presskey <3> Select submenu 03 again

Pr210 03

Pr210 03 12030 Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 12030 (department no.) Confirm submenu 03

Confirm input Submenu 4 is displayed Confirm submenu 04

Pr210 04 l 04

C 291 L11

H-

Save code structure The code structure is checked and adopted if valid. If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure must be re-entered from the beginning.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 15

7

Programming


Manufacturer code WAN 13 2.

Release barcode printing Ticket - Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon. - Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm. Label - Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total. - Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.

3.

7

Allocate barcode The barcode can be produced for the following data: Articles not saved in the scales: - Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215/02 -

Non-PLU non-weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/03

-

Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/ 04

-

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 /05

Articles saved in the scales: - Article (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/PLU no./ 05 -

For all articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211/ 03

Barcode types: Manufacturer code EAN 13 see page 7 - 17 The manufacturer's barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the article e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04. Instore EAN 13 see page 7 - 18 A code structure must be defined for the EAN 13 code. Definition in Pr 210. Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in Pr110/PLU no/05 or all articles in Pr 211 /03. EAN 13 printout has 13 digits. Code 128 see page 7 - 23 A code structure must be defined for Code 128. Definition in Pr210. Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in Pr110/PLU no/05 or all articles in Pr 211 /03. Code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing area.

7 - 16

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Manufacturer code WAN 13

Manufacturer code WAN 13 13 digits have to be entered for the manufacturer code. Enter numbers 1400151300062.

1

The first digit 1 identifies the entry as the manufacturer code and is not printed. Code digit for code format 1= manufacturer code

1

Pr110 05

2

1 400151300062

Fig. 62: Entering the manufacturer code

7 The following 12 digits are converted into a barcode and are printed as they are entered 2 . The last digit is a check digit created by the scale 3 . 3

2

Fig. 63: Print manufacturer code

_______________________________________________________________________ There are different types of barcode. One of the most common barcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The following example shows how the barcode is broken down:

Country digit

Manufacturer number

Article number

Check digit

-

The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer has applied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example, stand for Germany.

-

The manufacturer number provides information on the producer and is issued by GS1 Germany.

-

The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each article has its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide.

-

The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all the other digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 17

Programming


Instore code EAN 13

Instore code EAN 13 A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code. The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The number of digits per field is also defined in the structure. Menu setting - Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 - Pr 210/ 04

7

Create structure Check and save structure

12 digits must be defined for EAN 13. The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each field can be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left to right. _______________________________________________________________________ Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do so re-access submenu 02 or 03 . The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12. If this is more or less, the structure is rejected. _______________________________________________________________________

7 - 18

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Instore code EAN 13

Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields 12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale.

1

2

3

7

Fig. 64: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3) Menu

Input example

Note

Printing in field

Pr 210

02

Code structure number

Use this structure number in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 05 or Pr 211/ 03 Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 01

00002

Code EAN 13 with OCR

Pr 210/ 02

22

Code digit for price 2 Digits

Field 1 (code digit)

Pr 210/ 03

05040

Substring/Constant 4 Digits

Enter field 2 (sub‐ string) in Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 or Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 03

01060

Selling price 6 Digits

Field 3 (Price)

Pr 210/ 04

6.111.98.5.01.13

Check and save struc‐ ture

7 - 19

Programming


Instore code EAN 13 Example: Create barcode structure in Pr210 The following in-store barcode is to be printed: Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total). 1 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02 Pr210 02 1

7

Define barcode format Submenu 01 Pr210 2 Barcode types 01 10002 0= EAN 13; 1= code 128 2 3 4 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout. 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed. 5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Define code digits (Field 1) Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to GS1 Germany

5

5

22 02

C 18 LI H-

Define substring (Field 2) Submenu 03 (numeric code) Pr210 6 Numeric code 03 05040 05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU): 6 7 8 or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed) or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles) or 215/ 04 (Minus articles) or 215/ 05 (Total) 7 Number of digits for field 2 04= four digits for constant 8 Conversion of variable values 0=If in ”Numeric code” <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be enetered for the ”conversion of the variable values”.

7 - 20

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Instore code EAN 13

Define price barcode (Field 3) Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 9 Numeric code (encoded value) 01= price 10

Number of digits for field 3 06= 6 digits for the price

11

Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting

Pr210 03

01060 9

Check and adopt code structure Confirm submenu 04

10 11

Pr210 04 C 302 L11

confirm

7

H-

Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total) 12

Code digit for barcode type 0= Instore code

13

Barcode structure no. e.g. 02 The code structure is saved in Pr 210 under this number.

14

Constant is freely selectable e.g. 4-digit article no. ”0815” The number of digits depends on the number of digits for the part string 7 .

15

The remaining digits are without meaning, but must be assigned. Input: ”000000”

16

Scale check digit

12

13 14

15

Pr215 05 0 02 0815000000

5

14

15

16

Fig. 65: Printout example for instore code EAN 13

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 21

Programming


Instore code EAN 13 Example:

Pr110 In-store code for a PLU no. 05 0 02 0815 000000 Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure.

6-digit coded value without check digit

7

5

Field 1: 2 digits for code constant e.g. 22 for price code in Euro

7

Field 2: 4 digits for part string e.g. article number 0815

10

Field 3: 6 digits for coded value e.g. price 0022, 14€

16

Scale check digit

5

7

10

16

Fig. 66: Example of EAN 13 in-store code without check digit

5 digit coded value with check digit 5

Field 1: 2 digits for code constant e.g. 22 for price code in Euro

7

Field 2: 4 digits for part string e.g. article number 0815

17

Field 3:1 digit check digit for encoded value

10

Field 4: 5 digits for coded value e.g. price 022, 14€

16

Scale check digit

5

7

17

10

16

Fig. 67: Example of EAN 13 in-store code with check digit

7 - 22

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Code 128

Code 128 Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and the width of the spaces vary, depending on the code content. ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes the character set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN 799. The length of the code is variable. Menu setting - Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03 Create code - Pr 210/ 04 Check digit and save if valid The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02. The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 59. _______________________________________________________________________ Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-call submenu 02 or 03. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 23

7

Programming


Code 128 Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fields Any number of fields

7

1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 68: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price (Field 5), Department number (Field 6) Menu

Input example

Note

Printing in field

Pr 210

10

Code structure number

Use this structure number in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 211/ 03 Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 01

1000

Code 128 with OCR

Pr 210/ 02

ABCD

Code constant

Field 1 (Text)

Pr 210/ 03

01040

Selling price with4 digits

Field 2 (Selling price)

Pr 210/ 03

06040

PLU no. with4 digits

field 3 (PLU no)

Pr 210/ 03

02040

Weight with4 digits

Field 4 (Weight)

Pr 210/ 03

08040

Unit price with4 digits

Field 5 (Unit price)

Pr 210/ 03

12030

Department number with3 digits

Field 6 (Dept. no.)

Pr 210/ 04

7 - 24

Check and save struc‐ ture

6.111.98.5.01.13



Operating procedure: Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menu access Confirm code structure no. Confirm submenu 01 Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000 Confirm barcode format Confirm submenu 02 Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF

Pr 210 10 Pr210 01 Pr210 01 1000 Pr210 02

7

ABCDEF 02

C 14 LI H-

Pr210 03 Pr210 Confirm submenu 03 03 01040 Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 01040 (price) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm constant

Submenu 4 is displayed Select submenu 03 again Press <3>

Pr210 03

Pr210 03 12030 Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 12030 (department no.) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm submenu 03

Confirm submenu 04

l 04

C 291 L11

H-

Confirm input The code structure is checked and adopted if valid. If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure must be re-entered from the beginning.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 25

Programming


Code 128 Example: Create structure for barcode 128 in Pr 210 The following barcode is to be printed: Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no.. 1 Barcode no. e.g. 10

Pr210 10 1

7

Define barcode format Submenu 01 Pr210 2 Barcode types 01 1= Code 128; 0= EAN 13 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07. 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed. 5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Enter text (Field 1) Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. ABCD

Price (Field 2) Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 6 Numeric code 01= price 7 Number of digits for price 04= four digits for price 8 Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting

PLU no. (Field 3) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 06= PLU no. 7 Number of digit for PLU no. 04= four digits for PLU no. 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting

7 - 26

10002 2

3

4

5

5

ABCD 02

C 16 LI H-

Pr210 03

01040 6

Pr210 03

7

8

06040 6

7

8

6.111.98.5.01.13



Weight (Field 4) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 02= Weight 7 Number of digits for weight 04= four digits for weight 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting

Unit price (Field 5) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 08= Unit price 7 Number of digits for unit price 04= four digits for unit price 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting

Department no. (Field 6) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 12= Department number 7 Number of digits for department number 03= three digits for department number 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting

Check and adopt code Confirm submenu 04 confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr210 03

02040 6

Pr210 03

8

7 08040 6

Pr210 03

7

7

8

12030 6

7

8

Pr210 04 C 115 L19 H-

7 - 27

Programming


Code 128 Assign barcode

7

e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05

12

Code digit for barcode type 0= Instore code

13

Barcode no e.g. 10 The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is saved under this number.

15

Part string in example not used. Therefore the remaining digits are without meaning. Input: ”0000000000”

16

Scale check digit

12

Pr110 05

13

15

0 10 0000000000

1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 69: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields

7 - 28

6.111.98.5.01.13


7.9

Programming

Traceability marker

Traceability text Information about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10. The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals origin number 02 etc. The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in addition to the PLU text. 1 Traceability text 2

PLU text

7

2 1

Fig. 70: Traceability text Traceability no. The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale. There are 2 types of allocation: 1. 2.

Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up. Automatic traceability no.

Program traceability data for manual input -

Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10

-

Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -1 1= with data of origin

-

Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -1 1= manual traceability marker,

Program traceability data for automatic traceability number -

Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10

-

Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -1 1= with data of origin

-

Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -2 2= automatic traceability marker,

-

Define automatic traceability no. PR515/04 -01 (01-99)

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 29

Programming


By-Count

7.10

Overview of By Count article definition

By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package is defined.

By Count and fixed weight database configuration The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606. _______________________________________________________________________ All article data are deleted during setting database configuration.

7

Back up your data before database configuration. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Pr 606/ 08 - 81 Start database configuration The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

By Count piece goods General settings Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 or - Pr 515/ 07 -1 goods

7 - 30

Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16. Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming By-Count

Create By Count piece goods in a PLU The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces per package. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -3 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)

Unit price input (price per package) By Count piece good type Number of pieces per package

The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price per piece is determined and additionally printed. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0 Without back calculation or - Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1 Wit back calculation The price per piece is back-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces. The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces or - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1 With mandatory input number of pieces Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 31

7

Programming


Fixed weight

7.11

Create overview of fixed weight

The stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of the weighed weight. Fixed weight General settings Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 or - Pr 515/ 08 -1

Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19. Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

7 Define fixed weight in a PLU Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1 -

Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Pr 110/PLU no./17

Unit price input (price per fixed weight) Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib Type fixed weighed Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting

7 - 32

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming By Count fixed weight

7.12

Overview of By Count fixed weight

In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight. By Count fixed weight General settings Menu setting Mandatory input of fixed weight - Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19. or - Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

-

Mandatory entry of quantity Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16. or Pr 515/ 07 -1 Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles

Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 or - Pr 110/ 08 -1 -

Unit price input (price per package) Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib

Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 16 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 33

7

Programming


VAT

7.13

Overview VAT

VAT only for ticket and multi-user operation. If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows:

7

1.

Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 138. Pr606/ 07 -111 VAT on Pr606/ 88 - 81 The values set are adopted. The settings paper (Pr505) and operation (Pr510) need to be re-programmed.

2.

Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 95. Pr520/ 10 -1 Print Pr520/ 10 -0 No print

3.

Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 69. Pr230 VAT number 1-5 Pr230/ 01 Define VAT rate Pr230/ 02 0= VAT incl. 1= VAT excl. Pr230/ 03 VAT text

4.

A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 71. Pr231/ 03 0= Use VAT from article 1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles If a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored. Overwriting is not possible.

5.

Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 48. Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20 VAT number 1-5 Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1 The VAT can be overwritten. Pr215/ 09 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles Pr215/ 10 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles Pr215/ 11 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles

7 - 34

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming VAT

7.13.1

Assign VAT to PLU

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 231/ 03 -0

VAT is activated The VAT rate is created The VAT is used from PLU Pr

Call up menu Select menu

Pr110

7

000001

The PLU number is displayed. confirm Select submenu

Pr110 20

Confirm

Pr110 20 1

Enter VAT number

Pr110 20 2

Confirm The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1. Submenu 21 is displayed.

Pr110 21

confirm <1> press

Pr110 21 1

The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 28. Exit menu

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 35

Programming

7.14


Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00)

Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can be connected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch. For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant. Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can be transmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is also possible.

7

Process Continuous operation Registration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be done on all scales within the system. With key and operator key, e. g. the ticket can be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed. The following must be observed during continuous operation: Prerequisite - All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09). - All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display.

Menu setting -

The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales.

-

Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600) All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02). All scales need to have the same port number ( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ). One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9). Only one scale must be set as master. The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1). The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01).

-

_______________________________________________________________________ Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate in master data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be run on scales in price labeling mode. Continuous operation multi-operator .

is

only

supported

in

operating

mode

Master data maintenance only possible on master scale. Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale. _______________________________________________________________________

7 - 36

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming

System set-up During system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show the current system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during this time. System conditions with slave scales If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling message on the display. -

”Scale Network off” Scale not entered in system yet.

-

”Scale Update” Update of system data running.

-

If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master data from master scale are stored.

7

_______________________________________________________________________ It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales have been entered into the system. If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of a slave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time, synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scale update is started again. This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can no longer be integrated in the system network. _______________________________________________________________________

System identification If a device has been entered into the system, the arrow 1 flashes in the display .

1

0,000

-

Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system.

-

Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system.

-

0,00

0,00

Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 37

Programming


Take scale out of a system A scale in the system is to run as a single scale. +

Press and hold pressed, then press . ”WAIT” appears on the display and the scale starts booting.

1

0,000

0,00

0,00

_______________________________________________________________________

7

Sales data and ticket memory are deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale. If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again. The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system network data.

7 - 38

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming PLU maintenance 1--

7.15

PLU maintenance menu Pr 1--

Create, change or delete article (PLU). Up to 6000 articles (PLU) can be defined. _______________________________________________________________________ The number of articles (PLU) depends on the settings in memory management Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Define PLU

Pr 110

Print article (PLU) lists

Pr115

Delete article individually

Pr 120

Delete article from to

Pr 121

_______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 39

7

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

7.15.1

Create PLU (article)

.......................................................

Pr 110

All data related to a article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text unit price, tare, etc. ... Select 110 Pr110 _____9 Enter PLU number (1 to 6000) Confirm

7

Enter submenu

Pr110 01

Confirm Pr 110 submenu overview: 01= Unit price 02= Product group 03= Tare 04= Shelf-life days 05= Barcode 06= Price overwriting 07= Article type 08= Weight class 09= Data of origin 10= PLU article text 11 = Supplementary text 1 - 4 12= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields 13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-3 14= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes 15 = Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes 16= Mandatory input of pieces 17= Fixed weight 18= Fixed weight mode 19= Mandatory input of fixed weight 20= VAT number 21= VAT can be overwritten 22= Tare %

7 - 40

6.111.98.5.01.13



Unit price input _______________________________________________________________________ The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/PLU no./01) and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08). _______________________________________________________________________ Example: Weight class 1kg 100g

Unit price input 25,80 25,80

Price/kg 25,80 258,00

7 Submenu

01

Enter unit price

Pr110 01 0025,80

Save

Product group Submenu

02

Enter product group

Pr110 02 0001

0000-9999 Product groups are possible. save

Tare Submenu

03

Enter tare in gram

Pr110 03 0,002

Save _______________________________________________________________________ Article tare is country-dependent. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 41

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

Use-by date The sell-by date is only printed on labels. If entry smaller 900 (< 900) the text ”best before” is printed on the label. With entry 900 the text ”Use until” instead of ”best before” is printed. E.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same. With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc.. The shelf life days are added to the packed dates. The resulting sell-by date is printed. If ”000” is entered, no shelf-life date is printed. Submenu 04 Pr110 04 900 Enter shelf-life

7

Shelf-life t 900 = Printing shelf-life Shelf-life y 900 = Printing use-by date save

Barcode for article Prerequisite for printing the barcode, see page 7 - 15 Submenu

05

Enter 13 digits for barcode save 1

2 3

4

0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128) 1= Manufacturer code Code structure number

Pr110 05 0010815000000 1

2

3

4

Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/ 03 The in-store code must be filled with 000000.

7 - 42

6.111.98.5.01.13



Price overwriting The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 16. Submenu 06 Pr110 06

Enter selection

0

0 = Overwriting a unit price is not permitted 1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted Save

7 Article type Submenu

07

Enter article type

Pr110 07 0

save

Article types 0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight. 1= non-weighed - The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the article is the unit price that is entered. 2= minus -The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales e.g. for deposit on bottles. Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 -11 or - Pr 606/ 07 -10 or - Pr 606/ 07 -01 -

By Count and fixed weight on. Only By Count valid Only fixed weight valid

Pr 606/ 08 -81 Start Database configuration The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

_______________________________________________________________________ All article data are deleted during database configuration. Back up your data before database configuration. _______________________________________________________________________ 3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package. 4= Fixed weight 5= By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 43

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

Weight class _______________________________________________________________________ The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/PLU no./01) and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08). _______________________________________________________________________ Submenu

08

Pr110 08 0

Enter weight class

0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option 1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option

7

save

Data of origin Traceability data can be allocated to a PLU no. Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10 The data e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999, see page 7 - 29. Submenu

09

Pr110 09 0

Enter selection 0= without data of origin 1= with data of origin save

PLU article text Submenu

10

Pr110 10 C 500 LI H-

Enter article text Example: S

A

L

A

M

I

20

19

27

19

34

17

Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 9.

Start test print ”salami” is printed save

7 - 44

6.111.98.5.01.13



Supplementary text 1-4 Prerequisite Ticket - Pr 550/ 13 -1 -

Release print of supplementary texts.

Label Pr 555/ 16 -______1

Release print of supplementary texts.

1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text. The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200. Submenu

11

Pr110 11 _-_________

Enter 1,2,3 or 4

Pr110 11 1-000000000

Confirm

Pr110 11 1-_________

IEnter text number from Pr 200

Pr110 11 1-______ 101

7

Confirm

Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields BLD= Bizerba Label Designer. Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts. In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined. A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales. Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD. - Pr 555/02 -09 Select BLD label number - Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields Submenu

12

Enter text feld number 1-10 Confirm Enter text number from Pr200

Pr110 12 __-_________ Pr110 12 01-000000000 Pr110 12 01- 000000101

Confirm The text no. 101 in Pr 200 is allocated to text field 1.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 45

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

Logo print in BLD logo fields Graphic fields can be defined in BLD for label design. A logo can be allocated to these graphic fields in the scales. Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 - Pr 555/ 02 -01.... - Pr 606/ 04 -0 to 3

7

Submenu

Label layout from BLD. Select BLD label. Release BLD logo fields Pr110 13 _-____

13

Pr110 13 1-____

Enter logo field number 1-3 Confirm

Pr110 13 1-___ 7

Enter logo ID Confirm

In logo field 1, the logo with ID 0007 is being printed.

By Count: Piece per package Submenu

14

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-Nr./ 07 -3 Enter quantity 00-99 Piece per pack is possible.

PLU type By Count Pr110 14 12

Save

7 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13



Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight Submenu

15

Enter selection

Pr110 15 1

0= Without back calculation 1= with back calculation The unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated. Save

7

By Count: Mandatory input of pieces Submenu

16

Enter selection

Pr110 16

0

0 = no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input Save The number of pieces per pack must always be entered in the sale.

By Count: Fixed weight Submenu

17

Enter fixed weight for a package

Pr110 17 000560

000000 - 999999 Save

By Count: Fixed weight mode Submenu

18

Enter mode

Pr110 18

0

0= Standard 1= lboz (g) 2= oz (lboz) 3= oz (g) 4= oz (lb) save A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 47

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

Mandatory input of fixed weight Submenu

19

Enter selection

Pr110 19

0

Pr110 20

1

0 = no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input save The fixed weight must always be entered in sales.

7

VAT number Submenu

20

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 231/ 03 -0

VAT is activated The VAT rate is created The VAT is used from PLU

Enter VAT number 1-5 = VAT number save

The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the VAT entered.

VAT can be overwritten also see page 6 - 28 Submenu 21 Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 630 - Pr631/ 03

VAT is activated The VAT rate is created A VAT key must be created re-programmed keyboard is set

Enter selection 0= VAT cannot be overwritten

Pr110 21

1

1= VAT can be overwritten save

7 - 48

6.111.98.5.01.13



Tare % (dependent on country) If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. a PLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from total weight. Only the net weight is caluclated. Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%. If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare are deducted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g. If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and a net weight of 1348g. Submenu

22

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07

7 Permit tare %

Enter the tare % of the article. save

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr110 22

000,00

7 - 49

Programming


PLU maintenance 1--

7.15.2

Print PLU (article) lists

....................................................

Pr115

Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 4. Print all PLUs Select 115

7

Pr115 01

Confirm

Pr115 01 000001-999999

confirm

Pr115 01 000001-______

Confirm All programmed PLUs are printed. Print PLU selection Submenu 01 and 02 Enter submenu 01 = Print PLU selection with all article lines 02= Print PLU selection with first article line only confirm Enter start PLU no. Confirm start PLU Enter first PLU no.

Pr115 01

Pr115 01 000001-999999 Pr115 01 _____1-999999 Pr115 01 000001-______ Pr115 01 000001-____ 12

Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing PLU 1 to 12 are printed.

7 - 50

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.15.3

Delete PLU (article) individually

Select 120

......................................

Pr 120

Pr120 000015

Enter article (PLU) number Confirm PLU 15 is deleted.

7.15.4

Delete PLU (article) from - to

Select 121

........................................

Pr 121

Pr121 _____1-000000

Enter start PLU no. Pr121

000001-______

Confirm Pr121 Enter first PLU no.

000001-____ 10

Delete PLU 1 to 10 are deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 51

7

Programming


Data maintenance 2--

7.16

Data maintenance Menu Pr 2--

Define supplementary texts and allocate to a text number. Define barcode structure. Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are articles that are not stored in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________

7

Define supplementary texts

Pr 200

Create header and footer notes text

Pr 201

Create scrolling message

Pr 202

Print out texts

Pr 205

Delete texts

Pr 206

Define barcode structure

Pr 210

Create barcode structure

Pr 211

Non-PLU settings

Pr 215

BLD label list / print logo lisr

Pr 220

Delete BLD labels / logos

Pr 225

Maintain VAT

Pr 230

Manage VAT

Pr 231

_______________________________________________________________________

7.16.1

Define supplementary texts

.............................................

Pr200

An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This text number can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product. 500 text numbers may be defined. Example:A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 under the text number 10. In Pr 110/ PLU no./11 is where this number is entered, causing this text to be printed in addition to the PLU article text. Select 200

Pr200 _______10

Enter text number Confirm Enter text

Pr200 C 1500 LI

H-

see page 7 - 9 Confirm

7 - 52

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Data maintenance Pr 2--

7.16.2

Create header and footer notes text

...............................

Pr 201

In Pr201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and foot note text is saved under text number. A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at: Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05. -

Labels in Pr 555/09.

Select 201

Pr201 10

Enter text number

7

1 - 99 Confirm Enter header or footer text see page 7 - 9

l C 500 LI H-

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 53

Programming



7.16.3

Create text of scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202

Select 202

Pr202 10

Enter text number 01 - 99 Confirm

7

l

Enter scrolling message text For text input, see page 7 - 9

C 500 LI

H-

Confirm The output can be changed with control characters: &Z;= Display character-by-character -

&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

-

&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

-

&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences the subsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character. _______________________________________________________________________ Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516. _______________________________________________________________________

7 - 54

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.16.4

Print texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr205

Prerequisite - Ticket paper is in the printer - Pr 505 -0 Paper type Ticket paper is set Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5. Select 205 Enter submenu

Pr205 01

7

01= Print supplementary texts 02= Print header and footer texts 03= Print scrolling message Confirm

Pr205 01 0

Starting to print The stored texts are printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 55

Programming



7.16.5

Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts

Select 206 Enter submenu

........

Pr206

Pr206 01

01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually. 02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200. 03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201. 04 = Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202.

7

Confirm

Delete supplementary text individually Submenu 01 Enter text number from Pr200 1-999999999

Pr206 01 ______101

Confirm The text with text number 101 is deleted.

Delete all supplementary texts Submenu Enter 90

02

Pr206 02 90

Confirm All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted.

Delete header and footer texts Submenu

03

Enter text number from Pr201 Confirm Enter text number from Pr201

Pr206 03 _2 - 00 Pr206 03 02 - 15

Confirm Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.

7 - 56

6.111.98.5.01.13



Delete scrolling message texts Submenu 01-99

04

Enter text number from Pr202 Confirm Enter text number from Pr202

Pr206 04 _2 - 00 Pr206 04 02 - 15

Confirm Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7

7 - 57

Programming



7.16.6


.................................................

Pr 210

In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 is created. _______________________________________________________________________ Examples for - Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 23 - Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see pge 7 - 18. _______________________________________________________________________

7

Structure for Code 128 and EAN 13 Select210 Submenu 01= Define barcode format 02= Enter code constant 03= Select numeric code 04= Check code structure and save

Enter structure number

1

Pr210

01 - 99 1 Structure number e.g. 02

02 Pr206 01

Confirm structure number Confirm submenu

Create barcode format

Pr210 01

Submenu 01 2 Barcode types 0= EAN13 1= Code 128 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02 or Pr555/07. 05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed 1= OCR line is not printed 5 Module width 2 or 3 Pixel Confirm

10002 2

3

4

5

3

4

Fig. 71: Example with OCR line

7 - 58

6.111.98.5.01.13



Enter code constant Submenu

02

Confirm

l 02

C 20 LI H-

Text and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128. Text input see page 7 - 9 For EAN 13, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible. Confirm

7 Select numeric code Submenu

03

Confirm 1

2

Pr210 03

01050

Encoded values 1 2 3 01= price 02= Weight 03= No. of pcs. 04= Foreign currency 05= Part string from PLU Starts after 4. digit after the code structure number 06=PLU number 07= Middle check digit Input 07000 Only for EAN 13. middle check digit possible on pos. 6,7 or 8. 08= Unit price 09= Foreign currency unit price 10= Tare 11= Device number, see Pr 605 12= Department number, see Pr 604 13= Operator no. 14= Scale number, see Pr 603 15= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128 16= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128 Number of digits 01 to 10 digits

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 59

Programming


Data maintenance Pr 2-3

7

Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting 1= Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs. 2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding. 3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding. 4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding. 5= Floating comma only for EAN 13. The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. The increased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number of digits and position of the comma are established. 6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 10 7= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10. 8= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 100. 9= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 1000.

Brief example: Define code structure for Code EAN 13 (12digits required) Pr 210 05 Create structure number e.g. 05 Pr 210/ 01 00002 (EAN 13 with OCR) Pr 210/ 02 21 Constant e.g. 21 (2 digits) Pr 210/ 03 Pr 210/ 03 Pr 210/ 03

06040 07000 02050

PLU number (4 digits) Middle check digit (1 digit) Weight with (5 digits)

Pr 210/ 04

Check and save structure

1

Constant

2 digits

2

PLU number

3

Middle check digit 1 digit

4

Weight

5

Automatic check digit of the scale

4-digits 5 digits

1

2

3

4

5

Fig. 72: Example of barcode

7 - 60

6.111.98.5.01.13



Check and adopt code structure Submenu

04 Confirm

Pr210 04 C 337 LI

H-

Check code structure by printing out +

shift and hold,

7

then total. The entered code is printed.

Fig. 73: Print code structure

Check code structure in display

Decimals as configured 04 C 337 L8 H-

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 61

Programming



7.16.7

Administer barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211

Select 211

Pr211 01

Enter submenu Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Print code structures

7

02= Delete code structures 03= Code structure number for all PLU 04= Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position 05= Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position

Print code structures Submenu 01

Pr211 01

Confirm

0

The saved barcode structures are printed 1

Structure number

2

Barcode format

3

Field 1 code constant

4 5

Content field 1 Field 2 part string from PLU

6


7

Field 3 price

8


9

Conversion of variable values

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9

Fig. 74: Barcode structures Delete code structures Submenu 02 Enter first code number e.g. 1 confirm Enter code number., e.g. 10.

Pr211 02

_1-00

Pr211 02

01- 10

confirm Code numbers 1 to 10 are deleted.

7 - 62

6.111.98.5.01.13



Code structure number for all PLUs Submenu 03 The same barcode structure is assigned to all PLUs. Enter code number

Pr211 03

11

00= Take code structure number from PLU Pr 110/ 05 01-99 = Code structure number is used for all PLUs.

7

Confirm All articles (PLU) are printed out with barcode structure no. 11. The barcode structure is set in Pr 210. Module width Bars and spaces of a barcode have a standard pixel width. The readability of a rotated printed barcode can be improved by using a larger pixel width. Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position Submenu 04 Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position . Enter module width

Pr211 04

0

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01). 2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure. Confirm Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position Submenu 05 Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position . Enter module width

Pr211 05

0

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01). 2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure. Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 63

Programming



7.16.8

Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215

Select 215 Pr215 01 Enter submenu Confirm

7

Submenu overview: 01= Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) 02= Barcode for non-PLU weighed articles 03= Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 04= Barcode for non-PLU minus article 05= Barcode for total 06= Product group for non-PLU weighed 07= Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 08= Barcode for non-PLU minus article 09= VAT for non-PLU weighed 10= VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 11= VAT for non-PLU minus article

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) Submenu 01 Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 05 -01 or 11 Release print of sell-by date on label _______________________________________________________________________ Date representation depends on the setting in Pr 500/04. _______________________________________________________________________

Enter date

Pr215 01 190508

e.g. 26.04.2007 If 000000 is entered, no date is printed. Save

7 - 64

6.111.98.5.01.13



Prerequisite For ticket - Pr 550/ 01 For labels - Pr 555/ 06

Release print of barcode Release print of barcode

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles Submenu 02 Enter 13 digits for the barcode

Pr215 02 0000000000000

7

Save

Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Submenu

03

Enter 13 digits for the barcode

Pr215 03 0000000000000

Save

Barcode for non-PLU minus article Submenu

04


Pr215 04 0000000000000

Save

Barcode for total Submenu

05


Pr215 05 0020000000000 1

2

3

4

Save 1

2 3

4

0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128) 1= manufacturer code Code structure number Substring (free input) The number of digits is dependent on the number of digits for the substring. The number is defined in Pr 210/ 03. The in-store code must be filled with 000000.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 65

Programming



Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles Submenu

06

Enter product group

Pr215 06 0000

0000-9999 Product groups are possible. Save

Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

7

Submenu

07

Enter product group

Pr215 07 0000


Product groups for non-PLU minus articles Submenu

08

Enter product group

Pr215 08 0000


7 - 66

6.111.98.5.01.13



VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles Submenu

09

Enter VAT number

Pr215 09 1

1 - 5 VAT numbers are possible Save

VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Submenu

10

Enter VAT number

7

Pr215 10 1


VAT for Non-PLU minus articles Submenu

11

Enter VAT number

Pr215 11 1


6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 67

Programming



7.16.9

BLD label list / print logo list


...........................................

Pr220

Pr220 01

Confirm Submenu overview:

7

01= Print BLD label list 02= Print logo list

Print BLD label list Submenu

01 Pr220 01 0

Confirm The list of BLD labels stored in the scales is printed.

Print logo list Submenu

02 Pr220 02 0

Confirm The list of BLD logos stored in the scales is printed.

7.16.10

Delete BLD labels / logos


................................................

Pr 225

Pr225 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Delete BLD labels 02= Delete BLD logos

7 - 68

6.111.98.5.01.13



Delete BLD labels Submenu 01 Enter BLD label no.

Pr225 01 01-00

Confirm Enter BLD label no.

Pr225 01 01- 03

Confirm The selected labels are deleted.

7

Delete BLD logos

Pr225 02 0001-0000

Submenu 02 Enter BLD logo ID Confirm

Pr225 02 0001- 0003

Enter BLD logo ID Confirm The selected BLD logos are deleted. Example, see page 7 - 7

7.16.11

Define VAT

Select 230

.......................................................................

Pr230 1

Enter VAT number 1-5 Confirm Enter submenu

Pr 230

Pr230 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Define VAT rate 02= Incl. or excl. VAT 03= VAT text

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 69

Programming



Define VAT rate also see page 7 - 34 Submenu 01 Enter tax rate in %, e.g. 19% 0-99

Pr230 01 19,00

Confirm

Incl. or excl. VAT

7

Submenu

02

Incl. or excl. VAT 0= Incl. VAT 1= Excl. VAT

Pr230 02 0

Confirm

VAT text Submenu

03

Enter text

Incl. 19% 03 C20 LI

H-

Confirm A VAT rate is created. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be created.

Esc

Press

230

The next VAT number is displayed. Confirm The next VAT rate (no.2) can be defined.

7 - 70

2 Pr230 01

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.16.12

Manage VAT

......................................................................

Select 231

Pr 231

Pr231 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Printing list with VAT data record

7

02= Deleting VAT number 03= General VAT

Printing VAT list Submenu

01

Confirm

Pr231 01 0

List with defined VAT rates is printed.

Deleting VAT number Submenu

02

Enter VAT number 1 to 5 Confirm Enter VAT number 1 to 5

Pr231 02 1-0

Pr231 02 1-3

Confirm The data records of VAT numbers 1,2 and 3 are deleted.

Same VAT for all articles Submenu 03 Enter VAT number

Pr231 03 2

0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU 1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 71

Programming


Reports Pr 3--

7.17

Reports menu Pr 3--

_______________________________________________________________________ Configure report layout

Pr 300

Print reports on ticket

Pr 310

Print report on label

Pr 311

Display / delete sales

Pr 320

_______________________________________________________________________

7

7.17.1

Configure report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300


Pr 300 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Printing prices 02= Printing PLU without sales 03= Printing customer title for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03) 04= Printing customer title for product groups report (Pr310/ 04) 05= Printing customer title for operator report (Pr310/ 05) 06= Printing customer titles for scales overall sales (Pr311/ 01) and overall sales operator report (Pr310/ 05) 07= Printing customer title for origin data report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07) 08= Printing customer title for VAT report (Pr310/ 08)

Printing prices Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr 300 01 0

0= Prices are not printed 1= Prices are printed Confirm

7 - 72

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Reports Pr 3--

Printing PLU without sales Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr 300 02 0

0= PLUs without sales are not printed 1= PLUs without sales are printed Confirm

Customer title for reports

7

Submenu 03 to 08 New report title (customer title) are created in Pr 201. Assign text number of a title to report, e.g. 03. Enter text number

Pr 300 03 01

01-99 Text number from Pr 201. 00 Print Standard title.. Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 73

Programming


Reports Pr 3--

7.17.2


......................................................

Pr310

The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ Please note configuration of report layout Pr 300, see page 7 - 72. _______________________________________________________________________

7


Pr 310 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Scale report 02= PLU report with an article text line 03= PLU report with an article text lines 04= Product groups report 05= Operator report 06= Data of origin - sales report with one traceability text line 07= Data of origin - sales report with all traceability text lines 08= VAT sales report

Scale report Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr 310 01 0

0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and traceability data are printed.

7 - 74

6.111.98.5.01.13



PLU report with one product text line Submenu

02

Pr310 02 0

Enter selection 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print PLU report with one article text line is printed.

PLU report with all article text lines Submenu

03

7

Pr310 03 0

Enter selection 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print The PLU report is printed with all article text lines. 1

Unit price

2

Sales volume of this PLU

3

Overwrite PLU unit price.

4

Number of registration

5

Sold quantity

6

Product group

7

PLU article number

8

8

PLU text

7

* 6

5

4

3

2

1

Fig. 75: PLU article report

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 75

Programming


Reports Pr 3--

Product group report Submenu

04

Pr310 04 0

Starting to print The product group report is printed.

7

1

Sales for this product group

2

Number of recordings

3

Sold quantity

4

Product group number

4 3

2

1

Fig. 76: Product group report

7 - 76

6.111.98.5.01.13



Operator report Submenu

05

Pr310 05 0

Enter selection 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print The operator report is being printed. 1

Sales of operator 1

2

Number of sales deletions

3

Operator no.

7 3

The operator report documents 2 how often scale sales have been deleted before the current report.

2

1

Fig. 77: Operator report

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line Submenu

06

Enter selection

Pr310 06 0

0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print The report on traceability data sales is printed with one traceability text line.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 77

Programming


Reports Pr 3--

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines Submenu

07

Pr310 07 0

Enter selection 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print

The report on traceability data sales is printed with all traceability text lines.

7

In the traceability data sales report, the traceability data is printed with the number of sold items and sold weight. 1 Number of sold items 2

sold weight

3

Traceability text

4

Traceability no.

4

1

3

2

Fig. 78: Traceability data sales report

7 - 78

6.111.98.5.01.13



VAT sales report Submenu

08

Pr310 08 0

Enter selection 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report Starting to print 1

The VAT sales report is printed. Incl. VAT

2

Excl. VAT

3

VAT text

4

VAT rate

5

VAT number

7

5 1 4

3

2

Fig.: 79: VAT sales report

7.17.3


........................................................

Select 311

Pr311

Pr311 0

Starting to print The scale's total sales are printed.

1

Scale number

2

Total sales of scale

3

Number of sales deletions

1

3

2

Fig. 80: Total sales report 6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 79

Programming


Reports Pr 3--

7.17.4

Display / delete sales

.......................................................

Pr320

Pr320 01

Select 320 Enter submenu 01= Display overall sales of scales 02= Delete sales Confirm

7 Display sales Submenu

01

Pr320 01

Confirm

364,15

The scale's total sales are displayed.

Delete sales Submenu 02 _______________________________________________________________________ The overall sales of scales is completely deleted! _______________________________________________________________________

Enter 90

Pr320 02 90

Confirm The total salesof the scales is deleted. The deletion is being booked, see page 7 - 79.

7 - 80

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Device Configuration Pr 5--

7.18

Device Configuration Menu Pr 5--

_______________________________________________________________________ Setting date and time

Pr 500


Pr 505

Setting main operating mode

Pr 510

Setting switching operating mode

Pr 510

Settings for different operating modes

Pr 515

Scrolling message settings

Pr 516

Settings for multi-operator mode

Pr 520

Settings for quick-operator mode

Pr 521

Settings for price labeling mode

Pr 525

Configure operator keys with operator no.

Pr 530

PLU input mode and range limitation

Pr 535

Print out PLU direct keys

Pr 536

Tare fixed value memory

Pr 540

Rounding and price calculating settings

Pr 545

Create ticket and release printout of barcode

Pr 550

Create labels and release printout of barcode

Pr 555

Labels configuration management

Pr 556

Foreign currency settings

Pr 560

_______________________________________________________________________

7.18.1

Setting date and time

.......................................................


Pr500

Pr500 01

Article Submenu overview: 01= Setting date 02= Setting time 03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit 04= Date presentation

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 81

7

Programming


Device Configuration Pr 5--

Setting date Submenu

01

Enter date Input DDMMYY The sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04

Pr500 01 190508

Save

7

Setting time Submenu

02

Enter time Input hhmm

Pr500 02 0908

Save

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr500 03 0

0= Year with 2 digits 1= Year with 4 digits Save

7 - 82

6.111.98.5.01.13



Date representation Submenu

04

Enter selection

Pr500 04 00

Save Input in Pr 500/ 01

Print Example

00

Day-Month-Y ear numeric

DDMMYY

21.07.06

01

Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric

DDMMYY

21July 06

02


DDMM

21July

03

Month-Y ear alphanumeric

MMYYDD

July 06

04

Month-Day-Y ear American numeric

MMDDYY

07.21.06

05

Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric

MMDDYY

July 21.06

06

Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric

YYMMDD

06.07.21

07

Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric

YYMMDD

06July 21

08

Day-Month-Y ear numeric

DDMMYY

21-07-06

09


DDMMYY

21-July-06

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 83

7

Programming



7.18.2


.........................................................

Select 505

Pr 505

Pr505 0

Enter selection 0= Ticket paper 1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer) Confirm

7 7.18.3

Setting main operating mode

Pr510

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously. The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511. Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination + . Select 510 Enter submenu

Pr510 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01 = Select main operating type 02= Select layout 03= Addition of customer total

7 - 84

6.111.98.5.01.13



Select main operating mode Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr510 01 01

Save 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start

7

Select layout Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr510 02 0

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout Save

Addition of customer total Only effective on labels. Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards a total label is created The total is printed if ”with addition” has been set. Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr510 03 0

0= without addition of customer total. 1= with addition of customer total. Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 85

Programming



7.18.4

Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously. The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511. Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination + . Select 511 Enter submenu

Pr511 01

7 Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Select switching operating mode 02= Select layout 03= Addition of customer total

Select switching operating mode Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr511 01 02

Save 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start

Select layout Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and label layout e.g. multi-operator mode. Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr511 02 1

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout Save

7 - 86

6.111.98.5.01.13



Addition of customer total Only effective on labels. Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr511 03 0

0= without addition of customer total. 1= with addition of customer total. Save

7 7.18.5



...........................

Pr515

Pr515 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Automatic zerosetting. 02= Open tickets / labels 03= Traceability marker 04= Automatic traceability number. 05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted. 06= Determination of sales. 07=Complusory entry for By Count piece 08= Complusory entry for fixed weight

Automatic zerosetting Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr515 01 0

0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting). 1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero. 2= Scale is not set to zero. Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 87

Programming



Open tickets / labels Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr515 02 0

0 = open tickets are printed. After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed. 1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted. If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized ( ). Save

7 Traceability marker also see page 7 - 29 Submenu 03 Enter selection

Pr515 03 0

0= Traceability marker is off. 1= Enter traceability no. manually. 2 =Use defined traceability no. Save

Define traceability number Submenu

04

Enter selection

Pr515 04 35

00-99 = defined traceability no. Save All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text that is stored under the defined traceability number.

Negative customer total Submenu

05

Enter selection

Pr515 05 1

0= Customer total cannot become negative. 1= Customer total can become negative. Save

7 - 88

6.111.98.5.01.13



Sales calculation To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the total memory. Submenu

06

Enter selection

Pr515 06 1

0= Sold items are not added to the total memories. 1 = Sold items are added to the total memories. Save

7

Compulsory entry for By Count pieces Submenu

07

Enter selection

Pr515 07 1

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/16 1= Compulsory entry for By Count piece Save

Compulsory entry for fixed weight Submenu

08

Enter selection

Pr515 08 1

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/19 1= Compulsory entry for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 89

Programming



7.18.6

Scrolling message settings


............................................

Pr 516

Pr516 01

Confirm

7

Submenu overview: 01 = Select scrolling message no. from Pr 202 02= Select display location 03= Activate scrolling message 04 = Test scrolling message

Select scrolling message no. Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr516 01 00

00= Scrolling message not active 00-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202 Save

Select display location Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr516 02 0

0 = Scrolling message on customer side 1 = Scrolling message on operator side 2 = Scrolling message on both sides Save

Activate scrolling message Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr516 03 0

0 = Scrolling message starts even with open operator accounts. 1 = Scrolling message only starts when the scale is not being operated. Save

7 - 90

6.111.98.5.01.13



Test scrolling message Submenu

04

Pr516 04 1

Confirm The scrolling message is displayed with control characters

&Zscrolling message 04 - - - - -

7 7.18.7

Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520

_______________________________________________________________________ To ensure that the settings in Pr 520, it is absolutely necessary to set the operating mode multi-operator mode. Pr 510/ 01 -01Multi-operator mode _______________________________________________________________________ Select 520 Pr520 01 Enter submenu Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Constant key function 02= Print article and total label 03= Items Operator Display Mode 04= Cash register functions 05= Payment in/out 06= Talon print-out 07= Repeat ticket 08= Open ticket again 09= Print cancellation and canceled articles 10= Printing included VAT 11= Print ticket as requested

Constant key function Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr520 01 0

0= Fix unit price 1= Fix tare value 2= Fix unit price and tare value Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 91

Programming



Print article and total label Prerequisite - Pr510/02 -1 or - Pr 511/02 -1 Submenu

Label layout is set Label layout is set

02

Pr520 02 0

Enter selection

7

0= Print article and total label 1= Only print total label 2 = Only print article label Save 0= Print article and total label The article label is printed when an article is registered. The total label is printed if the and e.g. keys are pressed. 1= Only print total label The article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. is pressed. The total label is printed if the and e.g. keys are pressed. 2 = Only print article label The article label is printed when an article is registered. The total is displayed if the and e.g. keys are pressed. _______________________________________________________________________ The number of items is printed on the total label. The customer total (€) is only printed, if addition of customer total is set in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1 _______________________________________________________________________

7 - 92

6.111.98.5.01.13



Operator items display Submenu

03

Enter selection 1 Display for sheet cancellation 2

Display after recording

3

Display for total/subtotal

Pr520 03 001 1

2

3

0= inactive 1 = active

7

Save Example: The operator number ”OP 1” and the number of registered items ”Po 2” appear in the display.

Cash functions Submenu

04

Total OP 1 Po 2

*

[1]

2,54

Pr520 04 0

Enter selection 0= Check-out draw does not open; registration is always permitted 1= Cash register opens after pressing keys and. You can register when the check-out drawer is open. 2= Cash register opens after pressing keys and. You can register when the check-out drawer is open. 3= Cash register opens after pressing keys and. You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open. 4= Cash register opens after pressing keys and. You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open. Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 93

Programming



Payment in/out Prerequisite - Pr 550/ 12- 1 Submenu

Printout payment in/out

05

Pr520 05 0

Enter selection

7

0= without payment in/out 1= Payment in/out with a currency 2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and foreign currency * Save

Talon print-out also see page 6 - 25 Submenu

06

Pr520 06 00

Enter selection 00= without talon 01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds. Save

Repeat ticket The complete and printed ticket can be printed again. also see page 6 - 26 Submenu

07

Pr520 07 0

Enter selection 0= without repeat ticket 1 = with repeat ticket Save

Open ticket again also see page 6 - 26 Submenu 08

Pr520 08 0

Enter selection 0= without ticket reopening 1 = with ticket repening Save

7 - 94

6.111.98.5.01.13



Print cancellation and canceled articles also see page 6 - 26 Submenu 09 Enter selection 0 = without printing of cancellation and canceled articles 1 = with printing of cancellation and canceled articles

Pr520 09 0

Save

Printing included VAT

7

also see page 7 - 34 Submenu 10 Enter selection 0= no printing included VAT 1= Printing included VAT

Pr520 10 0

Save

Print ticket if requested also see page 6 - 25 Submenu 11 Enter selection 0= Print ticket as requested ( +) 1= Print ticket always

Pr520 11 0

Save _______________________________________________________________________ Customer ticket can be switched off The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customer ticket. According to EC regulation 90/384/EEC for ”non-automatic scales”, the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the sales transactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14. Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activated if you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of a customer ticket. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 95

Programming



7.18.8

Settings for multi-operator mode

Pr 521

Description, see page 6 - 4 _______________________________________________________________________ To ensure that the settings in Pr 521, it is absolutely necessary to set the operating mode multi-operator mode.

7

Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode _______________________________________________________________________ Select 521 Pr521 Enter selection 1 0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration with the Operator key. 1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is automatic. Confirm

7 - 96

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.18.9

Settings for price labeling mode *

...................................

Pr525

_______________________________________________________________________ To ensure that the settings in Pr 525, it is absolutely necessary to set the operating mode multi-operator mode. Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand or Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start _______________________________________________________________________ Select 525 Enter submenu

Pr525 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Labeling mode 02= Piece price multi- label printing

Labeling mode Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr525 01 0

0= Price labeling Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported. Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight. Batch total label with number of items and batch price. 1= Weight labeling Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported. Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight. Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. * 2 = Weight labeling only Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported. If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be ”0.00”. Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. * Save

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 97

7

Programming



Piece price multiple label printing Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr525 02 00

00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay. 01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay. Save

7

7 - 98

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.18.10

Configure operator keys with operator no.

Select 530

.....................

Pr530

Pr530 __ - ___

Enter key number (1-16)

Pr530 02 - 002

Confirm

7 Pr530 02 - 020

Enter operator number (1-999) Save

7.18.11

PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535


Pr535 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 02= PLU input: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 03= PLU-direct key mode 04= PLU-direct key allocation 05= PLU-range limitation 06 = Delay time for PLU no. input

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr535 01 0

0 = Entering the unit price via ten-key keypad. Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the key. 1 = PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad. Switch to unit price input by pressing the key. 2 = It is only possible to enter the PLU no. with the ten-key keypad and not the unit price. Confirm 6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 99

Programming



PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. Submenu

02 Pr535 02 6

Enter selection 2= PLU no. input with 2 digits 3= PLU no. input with 3 digits 4= PLU no. input with 4 digits 5= PLU no. input with 5 digits 6= PLU no. input with 6 digits

7

Confirm

PLU direct key mode Submenu

03 Pr535 03 0

Enter selection

0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU article number. With range limit: The PLU direct key no. calls the PLU article number allocated by the limit, see submenu 05. 1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked. PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad. 2= The PLU direct key no. calls the individually allocated PLU article numbers, see submenu 04. The range limit only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad. Confirm

PLU direct key allocation Prerequisite - Pr 535/ 03 -2

PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation.

An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key. Submenu

04

Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246)

Pr535 04 019 - 000019

Confirm Enter PLU article number (0-999999)

Pr535 04 019 - 000001

Confirm The allocated PLU article number is called up with the PLU direct key.

7 - 100

6.111.98.5.01.13



PLU range limitation _______________________________________________________________________ The PLU range limit does not affect the PLU direct keys where the setting is Pr 535/03-2. _______________________________________________________________________ If only some of the articless stored on the scales are required, the articless on this set of scales can be limited. Example:There are 2000 articless stored on the scales. Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100. Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200. Sausage articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc.

7

Only cheese is supposed to be sold on the cheese scales. The articless in the cheese scales are limited to articless 101 to 200. This means the smallest range article number is allocated to PLU 1. Submenu

05 Pr535 05 ___101 - 999999

Enter the smallest PLU article no. in the range Confirm

Pr535 05 000101 - ___200

Enter the largest PLU article number in the range Confirm Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and article 200 with PLU no. 100. Calls outside of the range are rejected. W/o range limitation Article number = PLU-No

With range limitation PLU

Calling PLUs

PLU

Calling PLUs

Fig.: 81: PLU range limitation 6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 101

Programming



Delay time PLU no. input If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is called after the set delay time. Submenu

06

Input time delay e. g.10

Pr535 06 10

00= The desired PLU is called up with or after entering all digits.

7

00-20 =The desired PLU is called after the set delay time. Confirm The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds. 1= small delay time; 20= large delay time.

7 - 102

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.18.12

Print out PLU direct keys

.................................................

Pr536

Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys. Select 536 Pr536 0 Start printing The PLU direct key list is printed. Esc

7

Cancel print job.

1

PLU number

2

PLU direct key

2

1

Fig. 82: PLU direct keys

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 103

Programming



7.18.13

Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540

Select 540

Pr540 _ - ____ Pr540

Enter the tare direct key (1-4)

1 - 0000

Confirm

7

Pr540 Input assigned tare value

1 - 0002

Confirm

7.18.14

Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr545

Customer total and article total can be rounded off to the last 2 digits. If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/07. The text has to be defined in Pr 200. _______________________________________________________________________ Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 545

Pr545 01

Input submenu Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Rounding of customer total 02= Rounding of article total 03= Rounding for By Count

7 - 104

6.111.98.5.01.13



Rounding methods for customer total * Submenu

01

Pr545 01 0

Enter selection Confirm 0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

Rounding of article total Submenu

7

*

02

Enter selection

Pr545 02 0

Confirm 0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100* Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 106.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 105

Programming


Device Configuration Pr 5-Examples of rounding Explanation

Setting 0

No rounding Rounding to 5 The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”. Rounding to 10 The last digit is always ”0”: Rounding to 50 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”. Rounding to 100 The last digits are always ”00”. Mathematical rounding to 5 The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”.

1 2

7

Example

3 4

5

mathematical rounding to 10 The last digit is always ”0”: mathematical rounding to 25 The last digits are always ”00”, 25”,”50” or ”75”.

6

7

mathematical rounding to 50 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”.

8

Mathematical rounding to 100 The last digits are always ”00”.

9

10.43 è 10.43 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.45 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.40 10.34 è 10.00 10.83 è 10.50 10.43 è 10.00 10.76 è 10.00 10.42 è 10.40 10.43 è 10.45 10.48 è 10.50 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.50 10.12 è 10.00 10.23 è 10.25 10.45 è 10.50 10.66 è 10.75 10.88 è 11.00 10.21 è 10.00 10.34 è 10.50 10.83 è 11.00 10.43 è 10.00 10.78 è 11.00

Rounding for By Count Submenu

03

Enter selection 0 = mathematical 1 = round up next position

Pr545 03 0

Save

7 - 106

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.19

Ticket design overview

Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket. 1

Scale number Enter Pr 603 scale number

1 17

2

16 2

3 4

5

Ticket counter Pr 550/10 - 1Ticket counter print Operator number

7 8

Minus inpit,

9

Ticket total

10

11

14

key

4 5

Unit price Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price Selling price Tare Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tare Pr 550/ 03 Tare print-out Non-weighed, key

6

3 15

6

13

7

Footer line zexz Pr 201 Enter footer text Pr 550/ 05 Footer text print-out Barcode see page 7 - 15. Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcode Pr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minus Pr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcode Pr 210/ Barcode structure for in-store code Pr 550/ 01 Barcode print-out Pr 550/ 02 Barcode height

8

12

9

11

10

Fig. 83: Ticket example 12

Item counter

13

PLU article text Pr 110/PLU no./10 Enter PLU article text Pr 550/ 8 Select font type Pr 550/ 9 Number of article text lines to be printed

14

Time Pr 500/ 02

15

Date Pr 500/ 01 Enter date Pr 500/ 03 Year number either 2- or 4-digit Pr 500/ 04 Select date format

16

Department number Pr 604 Enter number

17

Header text Pr 201 Create header text Pr 550 / 04 Print-out of header text

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 107

7

Programming



7.19.1

Create ticket

.....................................................................


Pr 550

Pr550 01

Confirm

7

Submenu overview: 01= Print barcode on ticket 02= Barcode height in mm on ticket 03= Print tare on ticket 04= Print header text 05= Print footer text 06= Print foreign currency supplementary text 07= Print rounding supplementary text 08= Font change on ticket 09= Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket 10= Ticket counter printout 11= Print foreign currency * 12 = Print amount paid in/out 13= Print supplementary texts 14 = Print header logo 15= Printout footer logo

Print barcode on ticket Submenu

01

Enter selection 1 Article barcode 2

Totals Barcode

3

Talon barcode

Pr550 01 000 1

2

3

0= Do not print barcode on ticket 1= Print barcode Save

Barcode height in mm on ticket Submenu

02

Enter selection 5-22 mm

Pr550 02 17

Confirm

7 - 108

6.111.98.5.01.13



Print tare on ticket Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr550 03 0

0= Do not print tare value on ticket 1 = Print tare value, net weight is marked. (country-specific character) Germany = N. 2 = Print tare value, net weight is not marked. Confirm

7

Print header text Prerequisite The header text has to be defined in Pr 201. Requirements The header text has to be defined in Pr 201. Submenu

04

Enter selection

Pr550 04 01

00= no printout of header text 01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53. Confirm

Print footer text Prerequisite The footer text has to be defined in Pr 201. Submenu

05

Enter selection

Pr550 05 02

00= no printout of footer text 01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53. Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 109

Programming



Print foreign currency supplementary text Submenu

06

Pr550 06 000000000

Enter selection

000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text 1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200 Confirm

7

Print rounding supplementary text _______________________________________________________________________ The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has taken place. _______________________________________________________________________ Submenu

07

Pr550 07 000000000

Enter selection

000000000= without rounding suppl. text 1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200 Confirm

1

Total

2

rounded total

3

Rounding text

1 3 2

Fig. 84: Example of rounding text

7 - 110

6.111.98.5.01.13



Font change on ticket Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 10). A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over the PLU font.

Submenu

08

Enter selection

Pr550 08 000

000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored.

7

Confirm

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket Submenu

09

Enter selection

Pr550 09 0

0= all text lines are printed 1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed 10 = text lines not printed Confirm

Ticket counter printout Submenu

10

Enter selection

Pr550 10 1

0= Counter is not printed 1= Counter is printed Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 111

Programming



Print foreign currency Submenu

11 Pr550 11 0000

Enter selection 1 Print conversion rate

7

2

Print unit price, selling price and total

3

Print selling price and total

4

Only print total

1

2

3

4

0= No printout 1= Printout Save

Print amount paid in/out Prerequisite - Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2


Requirements - Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2


Submenu

12

Enter selection

Pr550 12 0

0= No printout 1= Printout Confirm

Print supplementary texts Prerequisite - Pr 110/PLU no./11 Submenu

13

Enter selection

Assign supplement. text to article Pr550 13 0


7 - 112

6.111.98.5.01.13



Print header logo Submenu

14

Enter logo ID

Pr550 14 __12

0000 = Do not print logo 0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID Confirm Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto the scale. Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 7.

Print footer logo Submenu

14

Enter logo ID

Pr550 15 __12

0000 = Do not print logo 0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 113

7

Programming



7.20

Label design overview

Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label. 1

2

7

3 4

Label texts Pr 555/ 16 Print release for standard or alternative texts Pr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts Sell-by date Pr 555/ 05 Print Pr 110/ PLU-Nr./ 04 shelf-life days Pr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days Net weight Selling price

12

13

1

11 2

10 1

1 9

3 1

8 7

6

5

4

Fig. 85: Example of label 43 mm 5 6 7

8

9 10

11 12

13

Unit price Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 . . . . Print price frame Pr 555/ 16 Packaging date Pr 555/ 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 500/ 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 . . . . . . . . Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator no. Pr 555/ 17 PLU article text Pr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo printout Pr 555/ 11 Header Pr 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 . . . . Pr 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/08-1- . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 114

PLU unit price

Release print Enter date Enter article barcode Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode Release barcode print Enter height of barcode

Enter article text Assign supplem. text Release print of supplementary texts create beginning of text field create beginning of data field Set data field monitoring

Enter header text Release print of header text Enter PLU tare value Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key Release tare print

6.111.98.5.01.13



BLD labels These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued a number and are sent to the scales and stored there. _______________________________________________________________________ Release BLD text fields and logo fields in database configuration (memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4 see page 7 - 137 _______________________________________________________________________ 1

Logo field 1

2

Text field 1

7 1

2

Fig. 86: Example of label layout in BLD

Allocate content for text field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page7 - 45. Allocate content for logo field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page7 - 46 1

Allocated logo in logo field 1

2

Allocated text in text field 1 1

2

Fig. 87: Example of BLD label in the scales

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 115

Programming



7.20.1

Create labels


....................................................................

Pr 555

Pr555 01

Confirm

7

Submenu overview: 01= Label type 02= Select BLD labels 03= Label size 04= Change label distance 05= Packaging and sell-by date on label 06= Barcode on label 07= Barcode height in mm on ticket 08= Tare printout on label 09= Print header text 10= Alternative text with sell-by date 11= Logo printout 12= Beginning of text field 13= Beginning of data field 14= Monitoring data field 15= Font change on label 16= Print price frame and texts on label 17= Print Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit * on label 18= Print foreign currency 19= Layout turned by 180º (only with label paper) and reversing operation 20= Alternative text with packaging date 21= Alternative text with packaging date 22= Print units on the label 23= Print speed for label layout

7 - 116

6.111.98.5.01.13



Label type Submenu

01

Pr555 01 01

Enter selection

00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available Label type 01= Bizerba label standard 02= Bizerba label layout 1 03= Bizerba label layout 2 034= Bizerba label layout 3

Width

x height H 58mm x43 mm 58mm x43 mm 58mm x43 mm 58mm x43 mm B

05= ISB with barcode 06= ISB w/o barcode 50mm x48 mm

50mm x48 00

07= Small label with barcode 08= Small label w/o barcode 09= Small label w/o barcode 10= Bizerba label layout 4

33mm x47 mm 33mm x47 mm 37mm x 36 mm 58mm x38 mm

7

Confirm Example: B Label width H

Label height B

H

Fig.: 88:

Standard 01

Fig.: 89:

Small label 07

6.111.98.5.01.13

Layout 02

Small label 08 7 - 117

Programming



Select BLD labels Submenu

02

Enter selection 01... Select BLD label. Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01

Pr555 02 01

Confirm

7

Label size Submenu

03

Input label height, e.g. 43mm 28-148 mm

Pr555 03 043-58 Pr555 03 043-__

Confirm

_______________________________________________________________________ Input of 54,55 or 56 is rejected. _______________________________________________________________________ Enter label width e.g. 58mm 10-58 mm

Pr555 03 043- 58

Confirm

Change label distance Submenu

04

Enter distance

Pr555 04 16

8-40dot (8dot= 1mm) Confirm

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label Submenu

05

Enter selection 1 Packaging date 2

Sell-by date

Pr555 05 11 1

2


7 - 118

6.111.98.5.01.13



Barcode on label Submenu

06 Pr555 06 11

Enter selection 1 Article barcode 2

Totals Barcode

1

2


7 Barcode height in mm Submenu

07

Pr555 07 15

Enter height of barcode 5-22 mm

Only effective for pre-defined labels. Not effective with BLD labels.

Confirm

1 2

3 3

Fig.: 90: Barcode height 1 Beginning of text field 2

Beginning of data field

3

Barcode height

Tare printout on label Submenu

08

Enter selection

Pr555 08 1

0= without tare printout 1 = with tare printout Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 119

Programming



Print header text Submenu

09

Pr555 09 01

Enter selection 00= Do not print header text 01-99 = header text number see Pr 201 Confirm 1 1

7

2 3

Header field Logo Header text

2 3

Fig. 91: Header field

Alternative text for sell-by date Submenu

10

Enter selection

Pr555 10 000000010

000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 Confirm

Logo printout Submenu

11

Enter logo ID

Pr555 11 0007

0000= without logo 0001= Logo Kesko 0002= Logo Tuko 0003= Logo Eko 0004= Logo Sokos A 0005= Logo Sokos B 0006= Logo C 0007= Logo Recycling Confirm

7 - 120

6.111.98.5.01.13



Start of text field Pr555 12 00

Submenu 12 Beginning of text field in mm

00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label 11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label Confirm

Start of data field

7

Pr555 13 00

Submenu 13 Beginning of data field in mm

00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label 11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label Confirm

Example of label fields 1 Start of text field 2


3

Data field

4

1 2

Label height

3 4

Fig. 92: Label fields

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 121

Programming



Data field monitoring Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field. Pr555 Submenu 14 14 0 Enter selection 0 = no data field monitoring 1= Data field monitoring is on Confirm

7

Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article ”Calf's liver” The supplementary texts are not printed in the setting ”Data field monitoring activated”, as printing is in the data field.

1 2

5 5 3

Fig. 93: Data field monitoring on 1

Beginning of text field

2


3

Data field

5

Article and supplementary texts

7 - 122

no data field monitoring

6.111.98.5.01.13



Font change on label A font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over the PLU font. Pr555 Submenu 15 15 001 Enter selection 000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= fixed font Confirm

7

Print price frame and texts on label Submenu

16

1

Print out standard text, e.g. ”Tare”

2

4

Print standard text e.g. ”Packaged” or alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 20) Print standard text e.g. ”best before” or alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10 and Pr555/ 21) Print out standard text, e.g. ”Net or piece”

5

Print out standard text, e.g. ”Price”

6

Print out price frame

7

Printout of supplementary texts

3

Pr555 16 1111111 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0= No printout 1= Printout Save

Print operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label Submenu 17 Enter selection

Pr555 17 0

0= without output 1 = with operator no. (no. input in Pr 530) 2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605) 3= with digit code * Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 123

Programming



Print foreign currency Submenu

7

18

1

Print conversion rate

2

Print unit price, selling price and total

3

Print selling price and total

4

Only print total

Pr555 18 1100 1

2

3

4


180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) Submenu 19 Enter selection 1 1= Print layout rotated by 180º 2

1= Reverse label before printing

Pr555 19 11 1

2

0 = No rotation and no reverse operation 1 = Layout is printed rotated by 180º; label is reversed before printing 180° Rotation For labels with pre-print turned by 180

Fig.: 94: Example no rotation

7 - 124

Example turned layout

6.111.98.5.01.13



Reverse operation for standard labels With labels the height of the header field can be of different sizes Therfore, the header on the following label cannot be pre-printed. The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverse operation). If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing. If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text. If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary. Reversing in the case of BLD labels During the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba Label Designer, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined. The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project. If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in the header area. The layout is printed after reversing.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 125

7

Programming



Alternative text for packaged-on date Submenu

20

Enter text number

Pr555 20 000000010

000000000= No alternative text print 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 Confirm

7

Alternative text for use-by date Submenu

21

Enter text number

Pr555 21 000000000

000000000= No alternative text print 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 Confirm

Print units on the label Submenu

22

Enter selection 1 Print price with unit 2

Print unit price with unit

3

Print weight with unit

4

Print tare with unit

Pr555 22 1111 1

2

3

4

0= Do not print 1= Print unit Confirm

Print speed for label layout Submenu 23 The print result can be improved if the print speed is reduced Enter selection 00= 44 mm/s 01= 53 mm/s (e.g. for battery operation) 02= 66 mm/s 03= 88 mm/s 04= 102 mm/s (Standard)

Pr555 23 04

Confirm

7 - 126

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.20.2

Labels configuration management

.................................

Pr 556

All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01. Prerequisite - The layout memory has to be deleted. - Pr 556/ 03 Clear layout memory


Pr556 01

7

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Save configuration from Pr 555 02= Select label configuration 03= Delete label configuration

Save configuration from Pr 555 Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr556 01 1

1= Layout memory 1 2= Layout memory 2 3= Layout memory 3 Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 127

Programming



Select label configuration Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr556 02 0

0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing 1= Configuration from layout memory 1 2= Configuration from layout memory 2 3= Configuration from layout memory 3 Confirm

7 Delete label configuration Delete from memory x to memory x x = Layout memory 1-3 03

Pr556 03 1-1

Enter selection

Pr556 03 2-1

Submenu

Confirm Enter selection

Pr556 03 2-3

Confirm The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted.

7 - 128

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.20.3


...............................................


Pr 560

Pr560 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01 = Select foreign curreny function 02= Select foreign/ second currency display 03= Foreign currency calculating mode 04= Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout 05= Foreign currency characters on label for price field 06= Decimal places of foreign currency 07= Foreign currency factor 08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) 09= Rounding of foreign currency

7

Select foreign currency function Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr560 01 0

0= Euro/foreign currency off 1= Foreign currency function on 2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices) Confirm

Select foreign/ second currency display Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr560 02 0

0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional) 1= Foreign currency display on Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in payment in/out mode Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 129

Programming



Foreign currency calculation method Submenu

03

Enter selection

Pr560 03 0

0= Total calculated through conversion 1= Total calculated through addition of selling price Confirm

7

Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout Submenu

04

Enter currency symbol

Pr560 04 C11

LI H-

See tet input page 7 - 11 Confirm

Foreign currency characters on label for price field Submenu

05

Enter currency symbol

Pr560 05 C11

LI H-

See tet input page 7 - 11 Confirm

Decimal places in foreign currency Submenu

06

Enter selection

Pr560 06 2

0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency Confirm

7 - 130

6.111.98.5.01.13



Foreign currency factor Submenu

07

Enter selection

Pr560 07 0

0= factor 1 1= factor 10 2= factor 100 3= factor 1000 4= factor 10000 Confirm

7

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) Submenu

08

Enter selection

Pr560 08 0001,00

e.g. 0001.01 Confirm

Rounding of foreign currency Submenu

09

Enter selection

Pr560 09 0

0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100* Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 131

Programming


Database configuration Pr 6--

7.21

Database configuration menu Pr 6--

_______________________________________________________________________

7

TCP-IP settings

Pr 600

Display current IP address

Pr 601

Print out of communication settings

Pr 602

Setting scale number

Pr 603

Setting department number

Pr 604

Setting machine ID

Pr 605

Database configuration

Pr 606

Setting scale for system (continuous operation)

Pr 607

Control display lightning

Pr 610

Turn-of f time of scale

Pr 615

WLAN settings

Pr 621

Beeper on/off

Pr 622

Sensitivity of scale

Pr 625

Change key function

Pr 630

Keyboard selection

Pr 631

RAM clearing

Pr 666

Enter password for menu

Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695 _______________________________________________________________________

7.21.1

TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr600


Pr600 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= DHCP 02= Display of current scale IP address 03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected 06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected 08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scale. 32 ASCII characters are possible. 09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scale by the DHCP server.

7 - 132

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Database configuration Pr 6--

DHCP

Pr600 01 0

Submenu 01 Enter selection

0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address 1 = Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server. The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09. confirm _______________________________________________________________________ If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address, set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09. The DHCP server can then assign the scale a new address. _______________________________________________________________________

Display of current scale IP address Submenu

Pr600 02 172017168010

02

Confirm

IP: IP address if no DHCP selected Submenu

03

Pr600 03 172017168010

Enter selection Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g.

172.17.168.10 would be 172017168010

Confirm

Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected Submenu

04

Enter selection

Pr600 04 255255192000

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g255.255.192.000 would be 255255192000. Confirm

Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected Submenu

05

Enter selection

Pr600 05 172017129001

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.129.1 would be 172017129001 Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 133

7

Programming



DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected Submenu

06

Enter selection

Pr600 06 010001001100

Enter 12-digit number without point, e.g. 10.1.1.100 would be 010001001100 Confirm

DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected

7

Submenu

07

Enter selection

Pr600 07 010001001101

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 10.1.1.101 would be 010001001101 Confirm

Host name: Submenu

08

Enter name . 32 ASCII characters are possible.

Pr600 08 C32 LI H-

Confirm

Leasing address Display and input The scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this, DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1. If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. If the displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again from the DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server is requested to assign a new address. Submenu

09

Leasing address

Pr600 09 172017168008

Confirm

7 - 134

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.21.2


..............................................

Select 601

Pr601

Pr601 172017168010

7.21.3

Print out of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602

Select 602

Pr602

7

1

Confirm The communication settings are printed out

Fig. 95: Communication settings

7.21.4

Setting scale number

...............................................

Select 603

Pr 603

Pr603 12

Enter scale number 01-32 Confirm

7.21.5

Setting department number

Select 604 Enter department number 001-999

.............................................

Pr604

Pr604 120

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 135

Programming



7.21.6

Setting machine ID

...........................................................

Select 605

Pr605

Pr605

Enter machine ID

1234

0001-9999 Confirm

7 7.21.7

Database configuration (memory management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 606

Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Depending on the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items. If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small, the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to be reduced. Select 606 Pr606 Enter submenu 01 Confirm Submenu overview: 01= No. of PLUs 02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU 03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU 04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 05= Number of supplementary texts 06= Number of items (ticket memory) 07= By Count, fixed weight and VAT 08= Decimal places* 88= Start database configuration Examples of valid database configuration 2000 PLU 4 supplementary texts per PLU 10 BLD text fields 3 BLD logo fields 500 general texts 1200 items 5000 PLU 3 supplementary texts per PLU 5 BLD text fields 2 BLD logo fields 1000 general texts 1200 items 7 - 136

6.111.98.5.01.13



No. of PLUs Submenu

01

Enter selection 0100 - 6000

Pr606 01 2000

Confirm

Number of supplementary texts per PLU Submenu

02

Enter selection 0-4

Pr606 02 4

7

Confirm

Number of BLD text fields per PLU Submenu

03


Pr606 03 0

Confirm

Number of BLD logo fields per PLU Submenu 04 Enter selection 0-3

Pr606 04 0

Confirm

Number of supplementary texts Submenu

05


Pr606 05 0500

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 137

Programming



Number of items (ticket memory) Submenu

06


Pr606 06 1200

Confirm

By Count, fixed weight, VAT and tare %

7

See overview Define By count articles, page 7 - 30. Submenu 07 Enter selection 1 1= By Count on

Pr606 07 1111

2

1= Fixed weight on

3

1= Activate VAT

4

1= Tare % approved If tare % is approved, percentage value can be entered in Pr110/ 22.

1

2 3

4

0= off 1= on Confirm

Decimal places* *This menu is not valid for all countries. Submenu 08 Enter selection

Pr606 08 2

0-3 = Number of decimal places 4= Country-dependent Standard value

Confirm

7 - 138

6.111.98.5.01.13



Start Database configuration Submenu

88

Remaining available memory is displayed.

Pr606 88 375539

Enter selection

Pr606 88 ____90

81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scale boots. 90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved. The standard values are specific to country.

7

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 139

Programming



7.21.8

Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 607

Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 36. Function as of program version 2.00. _______________________________________________________________________ Always note! - There must be only one master scale in a scale system. - Each scale within the system must have an own network IP address (Pr 600) _______________________________________________________________________

7

Select607 Enter submenu 01-04

Pr 607 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01= Scale type 02= Multicast IP address 03= Multicast port number 04= UDP Port number

Scale type Submenu

01

Enter selection

Pr 607 01 1

0= standard scale (Stand alone) 1= Slave scale (system) 9= Master scale (system) Confirm

7 - 140

6.111.98.5.01.13



System conditions with slave scales. If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling message on the display. -

”Scale Network off” Scale not entered in system yet.

-

”Scale Update” Update of system data running.

-

If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master data from master scale are stored.

-

Arrow in display flashes = Slave scale in system.

_______________________________________________________________________ If the system arrow flashes scale.

, the device in the system is a master

_______________________________________________________________________

Multicast IP address Submenu 02 The Multicast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any address within the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in one system must have the same Multicast IP address. Pr 607 02 239192000024 Enter address Confirm

Multicast port number Submenu 03 Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Work setting Multicast port number

Pr 607 03 06789

Confirm

UDP port number Submenu 04 Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Works setting UDP port number

Pr 607 04 01031

Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 141

7

Programming



7.21.9

Control display lighting

...................................................

Select 610

Pr 610

Pr610 00

Enter selection 00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually.

01-99 = Time in seconds. Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time. Confirm

7

Switch display lighting on manually: +

Press and hold key then press key.

The display lighting is switched on or off. Automatic control of the display lighting: After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automatically after a period of between 1 to 99 seconds. Setting 01 Display off after approx. 1 second. Setting 99 Display off after approx. 99 seconds When another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on again automatically. _______________________________________________________________________ When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting can still be manually switched off. If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting can only be switched on again manually. _______________________________________________________________________

7 - 142

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.21.10

Turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr615

After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movement takes place. Prerequisite A switch key as main switch. With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off. Select615

Pr615

7

00

Enter selection

00= Scale is not turned off. 01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and no weight movement has taken place. Confirm

7.21.11

WLAN settings

Pr 621

Prerequisite - A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale. _______________________________________________________________________ Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN is deactivated; 621/ 01-0. If - 00000000 has been entered in 621/02, WLAN cannot be activated. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 621 confirm

Pr621 01

Submenu overview: 01= Switch on WLAN 02= Time slices 03= Ping on/off 04= IP address of WLAN module 05= Test telegram on/off 06= IP address of telegram recipient 07= Port number of telegram recipient

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 143

Programming



Activate WLAN Submenu 01

Pr621 01 0

Enter selection 0 = WLAN off 1 = WLAN off Confirm

_______________________________________________________________________ Procedure for WLAN activation: - Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0 - Make settings in submenus 02 to 07 - Activate WLAN 621/ 01 - 1

7

_______________________________________________________________________

Time slices The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set. Submenu

02

Enter time slice no. e. g. 1 0-3 Confirm Enter start and end time 1 Start time e.g. 8 p.m. 2

Pr621 02 _ -________ Pr606 02 1 -00000000 Pr621 02 1 - ________ Pr621 02 1 -20000800

End e.g. 08.00 a.m.

1

2

Active for the whole day= enter 00010001. Time slice inactive= enter 00000000.

Esc

Confirm

Pr621 02 _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Press

Pr621 02

You can now select submenu 3.

7 - 144

6.111.98.5.01.13



Ping on/off If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals. Submenu

03

Enter time Recommended setting 300 sec.

Pr621 03 _300

0000= Ping off 1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings. Confirm

7 IP address of WLAN module The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status. Submenu

04

Enter IP address

Pr621 04 172017168001

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1 Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 145

Programming


Database configuration Pr 6-Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN.

Test telegram on/off A test telegram is periodically sent to a host. Submenu

05

Enter time

Pr621 05 0900

0000= Telegram off 1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams. Confirm

7 IP address of telegram recipient Submenu

06

Enter IP address

Pr621 06 172017168001

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1 Confirm

Port number of telegram recipient Submenu

07

Enter port number

Pr621 07 49152

1 - 65536 Confirm

7.21.12

Beeper on/off

Pr 622 Pr622

Enter selection 1 Regular beeper 2

Acceptance beeper

3

Error beeper

111 1

2

3

0= Beeper off 1 = Beeper on Save

7 - 146

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.21.13

Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr625

The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place of installation (e.g. market operation). _______________________________________________________________________ The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of the display. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 625 Enter selection

7 Pr625 0

0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area 1 2

increasingly insensitive

.. 5= Display insensitive to vibrations Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 147

Programming



7.21.14

Change key function

Prerequisite - Pr 631 - 03

........................................................

Pr 630

84-digit keyboard; must be set. Pr630 0

Select 630 Pr630

7

_____

Press key. The function is active. {

Press any key e.g.
50

50>. The function code of this key is displayed.

Pr630 32817

Enter new functional code e.g.<33281> for fixed tare 2.

Pr630 33281

Press key. The new key function is saved. Another key can be modified.

Pr630 _____

Press . The menu is exited. _______________________________________________________________________ -

The function code of reserved keys e.g. ; ; etc. is not displayed and cannot be modified.

-

If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standard function code becomes active.

-

In menu 630 all keys are reset to the standard function code with and <9>.

_______________________________________________________________________

7 - 148

6.111.98.5.01.13



Overview of keyboard function code Code 12 32768 - 33023 33024 - 33039 33280 - 33283 33344 33345 33346 33347 33348 33538 33539 33540 33541 33542 33543 33544 33546 33548 33580 33588 33589 34066 34069

7.21.15

Keyboard selection

Select 631 Enter 00= 01= 02= 03=

selection

Function Paper feed Direct PLU key 1 - 256 Direct operator key 1 - 16 Fixed tare key 1 - 4 VAT key 1 VAT key 2 VAT key 3 VAT key 4 VAT key 5 Tare Subtotal Total Constant Manual Minus Cancellation Multiplication Switch from PLU input to price input Set scale to zero Operator tare Save operator tare Date key Print key

..........................................................

7

Pr631

Pr631 03

84-keyboard standard 84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame 84-keyboard with 30-front foil 84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host) Confirm Keyboards, see page 5 - 7

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 149

Programming



7.21.16

RAM clearing

....................................................................

Pr 666

Pr666

Select 666

00 Pr666 81

Enter 81 Confirm

7

RAM is cleared _______________________________________________________________________ The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing: -

Communication settings in Pr 600

-

Printer settings in Pr 710

-

Machine ID Pr 605

-

Database configuration (memory management). The values set in Pr 606 are applied.

_______________________________________________________________________

7.21.17

Enter password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690 PASS

Select 690 PASS Enter password

000000

000000 = Password is deactivated XXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers Confirm Password input is activated. If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

7 - 150

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.21.18

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting

..............

Pr 695

Select 695 Pr695 01

Enter submenu Submenu overview: 01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro) 02= Convert PLU price into EURO Confirm

7

Change main currency to second currency (Euro) Submenu 01 Pr695 01 0

Enter selection 0= Main currency in old local currency 1= Main currency in new local currency Confirm

Convert PLU price into EURO Submenu 02 _______________________________________________________________________ This function can only be called up if the old local currency is still active. Sales figures are not converted. Sales should be deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ Pr695 02 1 Confirm The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed to automatically.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 151

Programming


Service Pr 7--

7.22

Service menu Pr 7--

_______________________________________________________________________

7

Test print

Pr 700

Print boot log information

Pr 701

Print fonts

Pr 702

Print menu settings

Pr 703

Print weighing system information

Pr 704

Printer settings

Pr 710

Display ADC programming version

Pr 712

Display load cell type

Pr 715

Program version

Pr 716

Display battery voltage

Pr 717

Display test

Pr 718

Logbook control

Pr 730

_______________________________________________________________________

7.22.1

Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700

Select 700 Confirm

Fig. 96: Test printing

7.22.2

Print boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701

Select 701 Confirm

Fig. 97: Example of log information

7 - 152

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Service Pr 7--

7.22.3

Print fonts

.........................................................................

Select 702

Pr702

Pr702 1

Print with ticket paper Confirm All fonts are printed. Print with labels

7

Confirm The first 4 fonts are printed. Fig. 98: Fonts Confirm The next 4 fonts are printed. Press the key as often as required until all font types have been printed.

7.22.4

Print menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703

Select 703 Pr703 0 Confirm The current menu settings are being printed.

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 153

Programming


Service Pr 7--

7.22.5


Select 704

.................................

Pr 704

Pr704 0

Confirm Weighing system information is printed.

7

Fig. 99: Weighing system information

7 - 154

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.22.6

Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710


Pr710 01

Confirm Submenu overview: 01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm) 02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm) 03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm) 04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

7

Feed for labels Submenu 01 Enter selection

Pr710 01 12

00-1 1= minus infeed 12= Standard settings 13-24 = plus infeed Confirm

Move print format on the label Submenu

02

Enter selection

Pr710 02 12

00-1 1= minus infeed 12= Standard settings 13-24 = plus infeed Confirm

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 155

Programming


Service Pr 7--

Correct ticket feed Submenu

03

Pr710 03 20

Enter selection 00-19 = minus infeed 20= Standard settings 21-40 = plus infeed Confirm

7

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket In the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity for paper-end detection is set. When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the display shows the message ”PAPER END”. Submenu

04

Pr710 04 40

Enter selection 00= End of paper detection off 40= standard

increasingly insensitive

.. 99= insensitive Confirm

Change printing intensity If the barcode is upside down the readability can be improved by reducing the printing intensity. Submenu

05

Enter selection

Pr710 05 0

0= no reduction 1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10% 2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20% 3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30% Confirm

7 - 156

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.22.7

Display ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712

Select 712

Pr712 6026500004

7.22.8

Display load cell type

Select 715

.......................................................

7

Pr715 Cod

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr 715

150502

1

7 - 157

Programming


Service Pr 7--

7.22.9

Display program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716


Pr716 01

Confirm

7

Submenu overview: 01= Main program version number 02= Bootloader version number 03 = Option resource version number 04= Layout resource version number 05= Menu resource version number 06= Text resource version number 07= Keyboard resource version number 08= Font resource version number 09= Software version number (SAP number)

Main program version number Submenu

01

Bootloader version number Submenu

02

Option resource version number Submenu

03

Layout resource version number Submenu

04

Menu resource version number Submenu

05

Text resource version number Submenu

06

Keyboard resource version number Submenu

07

Font resource version number Submenu

08

Software version number Submenu

7 - 158

09

Pr716 01 00661117100140 Pr716 02 00061119500110 Pr716 03 00161117200140 Pr716 04 00061117300150 Pr716 05 00061117400140 Pr716 06 00061117500130 Pr716 07 00061117600110 Pr716 08 00061117700120 Pr716 09 61117000140

6.111.98.5.01.13



7.22.10


....................................................

Select 717

Pr717

Pr717 1 Pr717

confirm

12,218

_______________________________________________________________________ If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage (approx. 12 V) is displayed. - Disconnect scale from mains. The battery voltage is displayed. _______________________________________________________________________

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 159

7

Programming


Service Pr 7--

7.22.11

Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718

Select 718

Pr718 1

Confirm The display shows all figures and symbols.

7

Fig. 100: Display test Close display test

7.22.12

Logbook control

Pr 730

In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried. Pr730 01

Enter submenu 01= Display logbook 02= Print logbook Confirm Display logbook Submenu 01 Step 1

Software identification number. (Software ID) Accessing information

Entries from installation are displayed in three steps. Consecutive number of logbook entry, Department number, Component number. Version number of the loaded software. Date and time of download.

7 - 160

6.111.98.5.01.13



Example: Accessing logbook entries

Pr

Press key. Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on 10-digit keyboard.

Pr730 01

Press key .

Pr730 01 1

7

Press key Enter<>. for step 1 1

Software ID

2

Version number of legally relevant part

3

Version number of legally non-relevant part

Pr730 A10F

002

0200

1

2

3

Press key Enter < for further steps.>

1

Serial number of the entry

2

Department number

3

Component number

1

Software ID

2

Version number of legally relevant part

3

Version number of legally non-relevant part

1

Date DDMMYY

2

Time

6.111.98.5.01.13

Pr730 9 20 1

12

2

3

Pr730 A10F

002

0200

1

2

3

Pr730 140910 1

1058 2

7 - 161

Programming


Service Pr 7-If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed.

1

Serial number of the entry

2

Department number

3

Component number

1

7

Pr730 8 20 1

2

12 3

Pr730 bc 01 001 0170

Version number of the loaded software

1

1

Date

2

Time

Pr730 090410

1432

1

2

Hold down the key until all logbook entries are displayed. Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu. Pr730 02 Print logbook Requirement - Ticket paper is in the printer. - Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper Submenu

02

Confirm 1

Logbook is printed. Serial number of the entry

2

Department number

3

Component number

4

Version number of the loaded software

5

Date

6

Time

1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 101: Logbook printout 7 - 162

6.111.98.5.01.13


Programming Programming overview

7.23

Programming overview

Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all country versions. PLU maintenance Define PLU

Menu Enter PLUPLU number

Sub.

Pr 110

see page 7 - 40

Unit price

01

7 - 41

Product group

02

7 - 41

Tare

03

7 - 41

Shelf life days

04

7 - 42

Barcode for article

05

7 - 42

Price overwriting 0= not permissible 1= permissible

06

7 - 43

Article type 0= weighed 1= hand 2= minus 3= By Count (Price refers to piece per package) 4= Fixed weight 5= By Count fixed weight (fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package)

07

7 - 43

Weight class 0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb 1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb

08

7 - 44

Data of origin 0= without data of origin 1= with data of origin

09

7 - 44

Enter PLU article text (PLU number 0001-9999) Traceability text (number 9900-9999)

10

7 - 44

Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYY XX = Supplementary text 01-04 YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

11

7 - 45

Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX YYYYYYYYY XX= Supplementary text 01-10 YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

12

7 - 45

Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1-3

13

7 - 46

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 163

7

Programming


Programming overview PLU maintenance

7

Menu

Sub.

see page

Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes 00 to99

14

7 - 46

Unit price back-calculation 0= Without back calculation 1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or for fixed weight per kg is calculated)

15

7 - 47

Mandatory input of pieces 0 = no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input

16

7 - 47

Fixed weight

00000-99999

17

7 - 47

Fixed weight mode (A second representation is also printed in brackets) 0= Standard 1= lbs (g) 2= oz (lbs) 3= oz (g) 4= lbs (oz)

18

7 - 47

Mandatory input of fixed weight 0 = no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input

19

7 - 48

Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5

20

7 - 48

VAT can be overwritten 0= cannot be overwritten 1= can be overwritten

21

7 - 48

Tare %

22

7 - 49

000,00 (country-dependent)

Print PLU (article) lists

Pr 115

7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all article lines

01

7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first article line

02

7 - 50

Delete single PLU (articles)

Pr 120

7 - 51

Delete PLUs (articles) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy

Pr 121

7 - 51

7 - 164

6.111.98.5.01.13



Data maintenance

Menu

Sub.

see page

Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999

Pr 200

7 - 52

Pr 201

7 - 53

Define scrolling message Enter text number 01-99

Pr 202

7 - 54

Print texts

Pr 205

7 - 55

Define supplementary text Define header and footer texts Enter text number 01-99 Define header and footer text

Print supplementary texts

01

Print header and footer texts

02

Print scrolling message

03

Delete texts

Pr 206

7 - 56

Delete single supplementary text

01

Delete all supplementary texts

02

Delete header and footer texts

03

Delete scrolling message text

04


Pr 210

7 - 57 7 - 58

Barcode format

01

Code constant

02

7 - 59

Numerical codes

03

7 - 59

Check and adopt code structure

04

7 - 61

Managing barcode structures

Pr 211

7 - 62

Print code structures

01

7 - 62

Delete code structures

02

7 - 62

Code structure number for all PLUs

03

7 - 63

Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position

04

7 - 63

Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position

05

7 - 63

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 165

7

Programming



7

Data maintenance

Menu

Non-PLU settings

Pr 215

Sub.

See page 7 - 64

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

01

7 - 64

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles

02

7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

03

7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU minus articles

04

7 - 65

Barcode for total

05

7 - 65

Product group for non-PLU weighed

06

7 - 66

Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

07

7 - 66

Product groups for non-PLU minus articles

08

7 - 66

VAT for non-PLU weighed

09

7 - 67

VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

10

7 - 67

VAT for non-PLU minus articles

11

7 - 67

Print BLD label list/ logo list

Pr 220

7 - 68

Print BLD label list

01

Print logos

02

Delete BLD labels/logos

Pr 225

Delete BLD label list from - to

01

7 - 69

Delete BLD logos from - to

02

7 - 69

Create VAT Enter VAT number 1-5

Pr 230

7 - 69

VAT set 0-99,99

01

7 - 70

Incl. or excl. VAT 0= Incl. VAT (gross prices) 1= Excl. VAT (net prices)

02

7 - 70

VAT text , 20 characters possible

03

Manage VAT Print list with VAT rates

Pr 231 0

01

Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5

02

Use VAT: 0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU. 1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles.

03

7 - 166

7 - 71

6.111.98.5.01.13



Data maintenance

Menu

Configure report layout

Pr 300

Sub.

see page 7 - 72

Printing prices 0= Prices are not printed 1= Prices are printed

01

7 - 72

Printing PLU without sales 0= PLUs without sales are not printed 1= PLUs without sales are printed

02

7 - 72

Printing customer title for PLU report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

03

7 - 72

Printing customer title for product group report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

04

Printing customer title for operator report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

05

Printing customer title for total scale sales and sales ope‐ rator report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

06

Printing customer title for data of origin report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

07

Printing customer title for VAT report 00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

08

6.111.98.5.01.13

7

7 - 167

Programming



7

Data maintenance

Menu


Pr 310

Sub.

see page 7 - 74

Scale report 0= Print or delete report 1= Print or delete report

01

7 - 74

PLU report with one article text line 0= Print report without deleting 1= Print or delete report

02

7 - 74

PLU report with all article text lines 0= Print report without deleting 1= Print or delete report

03

7 - 75

Product group report

04

7 - 76

Operator report 0= Print report without deleting 1= Print or delete report

05

7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line 0= Print or delete report 1= Print or delete report

06

7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines 0= Print or delete reports 1= Print or delete report

07

7 - 78

VAT sales report 0= Print or delete report 1= Print or delete report

08

7 - 79


Pr 311

Print total sales of scale Display / delete sales

7 - 79 01

Pr 320

7 - 79 7 - 80

Display total sales of scale

01

7 - 80

Delete total sales of scale

02

7 - 80

7 - 168

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Setting date and time

Pr 500

Sub.

see page 7 - 81

Set date

01

7 - 82

Set time

02

7 - 82

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits 0= Year with 2 digits 1= Year with 4 digits

03

7 - 82

Date representation variants 00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06 00= Day-month-year alphanumeric e.g 21.07.06 02= Day-month alphanumeric e.g 21 July 03= Month-year alphanumeric e.g July06 04= Month Day Year American numeric 05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric 06= Year month day Hungarian numeric 06= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric 00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06 09= Day month year alphanumeric e.g. 21 July 06

04

7 - 83

7

Select paper type 0= Ticket paper 1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

Pr 505

7 - 84

Set main operating mode

Pr 510

7 - 84

Select main operating mode 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start

01

7 - 85

Select layout 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout

02

7 - 85

Addition of customer total 0 = without addition of customer total 1 = with addition of customer total

03

7 - 85

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 169

Programming



7

Configuration

Menu

Set switching operating mode

Pr 511

Sub.

see page 7 - 86

Select switching operating mode 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start

01

7 - 86

Select layout 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout

02

7 - 86

Addition of customer total 0 = without addition of customer total 1 = with addition of customer total

03

7 - 87


Pr 515

7 - 87

Automatic zerosetting 0= Scale is set to zero. 1=Zerosetting error 115 is displayed 2= Scale is not zeroset.

01

7 - 87

Open tickets / labels 0= open tickets are printed. after scale off/on 1= open tickets are not printed out and deleted

02

7 - 88

Traceability marker 0= Traceability marker is off. 1= Enter traceability no. manually 2= Traceability number rigidly defined

03

Define traceability number 00-99 Use defined traceability number.

04

Negative customer total permitted/not permitted 0= The total cannot become negative during sale 1= the total cannot become negative during sale

05

7 - 88

Sales calculation 0= The sold items are not added to total memory 1= The sold items are added to total memory

06

7 - 89

Mandatory input for By Count pieces 0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16) 1= Mandatory input for By Count piece

07

Mandatory input for fixed weight 0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19) 1= Mandatory input of fixed weight

08

7 - 170

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Scrolling message setting

Pr 516

Sub.

7 - 90

Select scrolling message 00= Scrolling message not active 01-99 =Scrolling message number from Pr 202

01

Display on 0= Customer side 1= Operator side 2= On both sides

02

Activation of scrolling message 0= when display is occupied or empty 1= only when display is empty

03

Test scrolling message

04

Settings for multiple-operator mode

see page

Pr 520

7

7 - 91

Constant key function 0= Only fix the unit price during sale 1= Only fix the tare value during sale 2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale

01

Print article and total label 0= Print article labels and total label 1= Only print total label 2= Only print article labels

02

7 - 92

Operator items display mode 000 1= Display for sheet cancellation 1= Display after registration 1= Display for total/subtotal

03

7 - 93

Cash register functions 0= Cash drawer does not open 1= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and operator key 2= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope‐ rator key 3= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and operator key 4= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope‐ rator key

04

Payment in/out 0= without payment in/out 1= Payment in/out with a currency 2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and fo‐ reign currency *

05

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 94

7 - 171

Programming



7

Configuration

Menu

Sub.

see page

Talon printout 00= without talon 01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds

Pr 520

06

7 - 94

Repeat ticket 0= without repeat ticket 1 = with repeat ticket

07

Open ticket again 0= without repeat ticket 1 = with ticket reopening

08

Print cancellation and canceled articles 0= no printout 1= with printout

09

7 - 95

Printing included VAT 0= no printout 1= with printout

10

7 - 95

Print ticket after 0= Print ticket as requested with +) 1= Print ticket always

11

7 - 95

Setting for quick-service mode Pr 521 0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with operator key. 1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is auto‐ matic.

7 - 172

7 - 96

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Settings for price labeling mode *

Pr 525

Sub.

7 - 97

Labeling mode 0= Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported. 1= Weight labeling label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible. 2= Weight labeling label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible.

01

Piece price multi- label printing 00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay. 01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay.

02

Configure operator keys with operator no. TT-VVV TT (keys 1-16) VW (operator 1-999)

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7

Pr 530

7 - 99

7 - 173

Programming



7

Configuration

Menu

PLU input mode and range limitation

Pr 535

Sub.

see page 7 - 99

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad Switching to PLU input with switch key 1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad Switching to unit price input with switch key 2 = PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad

01

PLU input: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 2= PLU input with 2 digits 3= PLU input with 3 digits 4= PLU input with 4 digits 5= PLU input with 5 digits 6= PLU input with 6 digits

02

PLU-direct key mode 0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to the PLU no. 1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked 2= PLU number results from the PLU key assignment, see sub 4

03

PLU direct key allocation XXX-YYYYYY XXX= PLU direct key 001-246 YYYYYY PLU number 001-999999

04

PLU range limitation 000001-999999

05

7 - 101

PLU call delay time 0= PLU is called with or after entering all digits. 1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= small delay; 20= big delay

06

7 - 102

7 - 100

Print PLU direct keys

Pr 536

7 - 103

Tare fixed value memory 1-4 X-YYYY X= Direct tare key 1-4 YYYY= Assigned tare

Pr 540

7 - 104

7 - 174

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency

Pr 545

Sub.

7 - 104

Rounding methods for customer total 0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

01

Rounding of article total 0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

02

Rounding for By Count 0= mathematical 1= round up next position

03

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7 - 105

7

7 - 105

7 - 175

Programming


Programming overview Configuration

Menu

Sub.

Ticket design overview Design ticket

7

see page 7 - 107

Pr 550

7 - 108

Print barcode on ticket 000 1= PLU barcode on; 0= off 1= Total barcode on; 0= off 1= Talon barcode on; 0= off

01

Barcode height in mm on ticket 5-22 mm

02

7 - 108

Print tare on ticket 0= Do not print tare value on ticket 1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-‐ dependent character) 2 = Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N

03

7 - 109

Print header text 00= without header text 01-99 = Header text number

04

Print footer text 00= without footer text 01-99 = Footer text number

05

Foreign currency suppl.text 000000000= without foreign currency suppl. text 1-999999999 = Foreign currency suppl. text number

06

7 - 110

Rounding suppl. text 000000000= without rounding suppl. text 1-999999999 = Rounding suppl. text number

07

7 - 110

Font type change on ticket 000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= fixed font

08

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket 0= all article text lines are printed 1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed 10= Text lines not printed

09

Ticket counter printout 0= Counter is not printed 1= Counter is printed

10

7 - 176

7 - 111

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Sub.

see page

Print foreign currency 0000 1= Print conversion rate 1= Print unit price, selling price and total 1= Print selling price and total 1= Only print total

Pr 550

11

7 - 112

Print amount paid in/out 0= no printout 1= Printout

12

7 - 112

Print supplementary texts 0= no printout 1= Printout

13

7 - 112

Print header logo 0000= No printout 1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

14

7 - 113

Print footer logo 0= no printout 1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

15

7 - 113

Label design - overview

7 - 114

BLD labels

7 - 115

Design label

Pr 555

7 - 116

Label type 00= label from BLD 01 ... predefined label from scales

01

7 - 117

Select BLD label Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01 1.. Select BLD label.

02

7 - 118

Label size HHH-WW HHH= Label height 28-105 mm WW= Label width 10-58 mm

03

Change label distance 8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm)

04

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label 00 1= Packaging date on; 0= off 1= Sell-by date on; 0= off

05

7 - 118

Barcode on label 00 1= PLU barcode on; 0= off 1= Total barcode on; 0= off

06

7 - 119

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 177

7

Programming



7

Configuration

Menu

Sub.

Barcode height in mm 5 - 22mm

Pr 555

07

see page

Tare printout on label 0= without tare 1= with tare

08

Print header text 00= without header text 01-99 = header text number

09

7 - 120

Alternative text with sell-by date 000000000= No alternative text. 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text

10

7 - 120

Logo printout Enter 0000= without logo 0001-9999 = Logo ID (print logo)

11

7 - 120

Start of text field Start of text field in mm 11 - 84

12

7 - 121

Start of data field Start of data field in mm 11 - 84

13

Data field monitoring 0= off 1 = active

14

7 - 122

Font change on label 0= Font from PLU 1= fixed font

15

7 - 123

16

7 - 123

Print price frame and texts on label: 1= Print ”TARE” 1= Print ”Packaged on” 1= Print ”Sell by” 1= Print ”Net” or ”Pcs” 1= Print ”Price” 1= Print price frame 1= Printout suppl. text

7 - 178

0000000

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Sub.

see page

Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label 0= without output 1= with operator no. 2= with machine ID 3= with digit code *

Pr 555

17

7 - 123

Print foreign currency: 0000 1= Print conversion rate 1= Print unit price, selling price and total 1= Print selling price and total 1= Only print total

18

7 - 124

Rotate label layout by 180oand reverse operation 11 1= Print label rotated 1= Reverse label before printing

19

Alternative text for packaged-on date 0= Standard text from resource 1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200

20

7 - 126

Alternative text for use-by date 0= Standard text from resource 1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200

21

7 - 126

Print units on the label 1111 1= Print price per unit 1= Print unit price per unit 1= Print weight with unit 1= Print tare with unit

22

7 - 126

Print speed for label layout 00= 44 mm/s 01= 53 mm/s (Battery operation) 02= 66 mm/s 03= 88 mm/s 04= 102 mm/s (Standard)

23

7 - 126

6.111.98.5.01.13

7

7 - 179

Programming



7

Configuration

Menu

Label configuration management

Pr 556

Sub.

7 - 127

Save configuration from 555 1-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted (556 / 03)

01

Select label configuration 0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing 1= Configuration from memory 1 2= Configuration from memory 2 3= Configuration from memory 3

02

Delete label configuration Delete memory 1-3

03


Pr 560 *

7 - 128

7 - 129

Select foreign currency function 0= Euro/foreign currency off 1= Euro function on 2= Foreign currency function on

01

Select foreign/ second currency display 0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-operational) 1= Foreign currency display on Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in payment in/out mode

02

Calculation method for foreign currency 0= Total calculated through conversion 1= Total calculated through addition of selling price

03

Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout

04

Foreign currency characters on label for price field

05

Decimal places in foreign currency 0-3 decimal places

06

Foreign currency factor 0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000

07

7 - 180

see page

7 - 130

7 - 131

6.111.98.5.01.13



Configuration

Menu

Sub.

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. €)

Pr 560

08

Rounding of foreign currency 0= no rounding 1= rounding to 5 2 = rounding to 10 3= rounding to 50 4= rounding to 100 5 = mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

6.111.98.5.01.13

09

see page

7 - 131

7

7 - 181

Programming



7


Menu

TCP-IP settings

Pr 600

Sub.

7 - 132

DHCP 0= No DHCP, use fixed IP addresses 1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.

01

Display of current IP address

02

IP: IP address if no DHCP selected

03

Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected

04

Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected

05


06


07

Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible.

08

Leasing address from DHCP

09


Pr 601

Printout of communication settings

Pr 602

Set scale no 01 - 32

Pr 603

Set department no 001-999

Pr 604

Set machine ID 0001 - 9999

Pr 605

7 - 182

see page

7 - 133

7 - 134

7 - 135

7 - 136

6.111.98.5.01.13




Menu

Database configuration (memory management).

Pr 606

Sub.

see page 7 - 136

Number of PLU 100 - 6000

01

7 - 137

Number of supplementary texts per PLU 0-4

02

7 - 137

Number of BLD text fields per PLU

03

7 - 137

Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 0 - 3

04

7 - 137

Number of supplementary texts 50- 1000

05

7 - 137

06

7 - 138

By Count, fixed weight and VAT 000 1= By Count on; 0= off 1= fixed weight on; 0= off 1= Activate VAT; 0= deactivated 1= Tare % permissible, 0= Tare % not permissible (country-dependent)

07

7 - 138

Decimal places 0-3 = Number of decimal places 4= Standard value (country-dependent)

08

7 - 138

Start Database configuration

88

7 - 139

Number of items (ticket memory)

00 - 10

50- 1200

Set scale for system (from program version 2.00)

Pr 607

7 - 140

Scale type 0= Standalone; 1= Slave; 9=Master

01

7 - 140

Multicast IP address

02

7 - 141

Multicast IP port number

03

7 - 141

UDP port number

04

7 - 141

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 183

7

Programming



7


Menu

Sub.

Control display lighting 00= automatic display illumination off 1-99 = automatic display illumination on

Pr 610

7 - 142

Scales switch-off time 1-99 in minutes

Pr 615

7 - 143

WLAN settings The settings 02-07 only possible, if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01

Pr 621

Module on/off 0 = WLAN off 1= WLAN on

01

Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of time X-YYYYYYYY X= 1-3 time slices YYYYYYYY= Time on/off

02

Ping interval 0000= Ping off 0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec. Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01)

03

IP address for WLAN

04

000000000000

Test telegram to host 0= Send off 0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.

05

IP address of telegram recipient 000000000000

06

Port number of telegram recipient 0001-65536 (standard= 49152)

07

Switch on/off beeper 000 1= Normal beeper on; 0= off 1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off 1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off

7 - 184

see page

Pr 622

6.111.98.5.01.13




Menu

Sub.

Scale (display) sensitivity 0-5 0= Display sensitive .. 5= Display less sensitive against vibrations

Pr 625

7 - 147

Reconfigure keyboard

Pr 630

7 - 148

Keyboard selection 00= 84-keyboard standard 01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame 02 = 84-keyboard with 30 front foil 03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed

Pr 631

7 - 149

Clearing RAM 81 RAM is cleared

Pr 666

Input password for menu 1XXXXX 6-digit numeric password 000000 Password is deactivated

Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings

Pr 695

7 7 - 150

7 - 151

Change main currency to second currency 0= Main currency in old local currency 1= Main currency in new local currency

01

Convert PLU price into Euro

02

6.111.98.5.01.13

see page

7 - 185

Programming



7

Service

Menu

Sub.

see page

Test printing

Pr 700

7 - 152

Print boot log information

Pr 701

7 - 152

Print fonts

Pr 702

7 - 153

Print menu settings

Pr 703

7 - 153


Pr 704

7 - 154

Printer settings

Pr 710

7 - 155

Infeed for labels 00 - 11 = minus feed 12 Standard settings 13-24 plus infeed

01

Move print format on the label 00 - 11 = minus feed 12 Standard settings 13-24 plus infeed

02

7 - 155

Correct ticket feed 00-19 minus feed 20 Standard settings 21-40 plus infeed

03

7 - 156

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket 00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec‐ tion) 00= Paper end detection off 40= Standard settings

04

Change printing intensity 0= no reduction 1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10% 2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20% 3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30%

05

Display ADC program version

Pr 712

Detailed display

Pr 714

Display ADC type

Pr 715

7 - 186

7 - 157 7 - 157

6.111.98.5.01.13



Service

Menu

Display program version

Pr 716

Sub.

7 - 158

Main program

Version number

01

Boot loader

Version number

02

Option resource

Version number

03

Layout resource

Version number

04

Menu resource

Version number

05

Text resource

Version number

06

Keyboard resource Version number

07

Font resource

08

Version number

SAP number

see page

7

09


Pr 717

7 - 159

Display test

Pr 718

7 - 160

Logbook monitoring

Pr 730

7 - 160

Display logbook

01

7 - 161

Print out logbook

02

7 - 162

6.111.98.5.01.13

7 - 187

Programming



7

7 - 188

6.111.98.5.01.13


8

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

You can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the described remedy. In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described in this Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point. Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details: -

Device type (see type plate)

-

Device no. (see type plate)

-

Error description

This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff.

8.1

8

Fault description Fault

Display does not illumi‐ nate.

Cause No supply voltage.

Rectification Check and insert power cable. Check connection plug Check connection cable Press On-Off key

Weight value display not Load plate not correctly posi‐ at zero or modified. tioned or objects located on the load plate.

Clean load plate, position cor‐ rectly and remove objects.

Soiling on or beneath the load plate. Level scale. Scale not leveled.

Switch scale off/on.

Printer will not print.

Open print head.

Connect print head correctly (see page 5 - 10).

Printer jammed.

Drive motor for paper trans‐ port overloaded or jammed.

Check paper track and re‐ move any detached labels. Clean printer (paper guide).

Poor receipt or label printing.

6.111.98.5.01.13

Unsuitable receipt or label pa‐ Clean thermal strip. per.

8-1

Troubleshooting

8.2


Messages

Operating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by ”Cod” and an error code digit. Display

Cod 1 1 2 kg T

kg

Price / kg

Price

Cause

Messages

8

Rectification

Cod 112

Movement of the scale during start-up.

Do not move the scale!

Cod 110

Scale loaded during start-up.

Unload scales!

Cod 110

Scale below zero during start-‐ Fit load plate! up.

Cod 110

Scale below zero after start-‐ up.

Fit load plate and press key!

Error 073

Scale sales overflow.

Print and delete sales, see menus Pr 310, Pr 311 and Pr 320

PAPErEND

End of paper

insert new ticket paper or new label roll.

incorrect setting

Check setting in Pr 505. 0= Receipt paper 1=Label paper

---

Press key or switch the scale off and on again with the key.

Other error code digits

8-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


9

Maintenance

Maintenance

9.1

Cleaning

The cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation and maintenance.

9.1.1

Cleaning device

_______________________________________________________________________ DANGER

Water getting into device! Danger of death from electric shock. -

Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning.

-

Do not wash device off or spray-wash.

9

_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION

Incorrect cleaning agents! Damage of device surfaces. -

Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________ Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug. _______________________________________________________________________ Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft, non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly.

6.111.98.5.01.13

9-1

Maintenance

9.1.2


Cleaning the printer

Clean thermal bar Ticket printer, label printer or Linerless printer. The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice that the printing quality has decreased. _______________________________________________________________________ ATTENTION

Coated thermal bar! The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must not be touched or cleaned with hard objects. Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar.

_______________________________________________________________________

9

1

Open the side cover of the scale. Open the printer cover by pulling it upwards. Open the printhead. Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerba thermal printhead cleaning pen or dip a cleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent.. Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaning bud.

Fig. 102: Thermal bar

9-2

6.111.98.5.01.13


Maintenance

Clean label printer Inspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor and paper deflector and clean. Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin.

1

Open the printer cover and printhead. Remove the label roll. Remove glue from parts

1

.

1

9 Fig. 103: Deflection pin, take-up pin Clean paper deflector Pull the paper deflector

out sideways.

2

Clean the paper deflector with the LR label remover, from Bizerba. The ”LR-label remover” may not be used to clean thermal bars. 2

Fig. 104: Paper deflector Push the paper deflector

6.111.98.5.01.13

2

in sideways.

9-3

Maintenance

9.1.3


Cleaning products for printer

Ordering information The cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technical consultants. Cleaner for thermal bar Cleaning pen 12ml Order no.: 5077 7050000

or

9 Aerosol can, 200ml Order no.: 9400 8900133

Thermal bar cleaning set consisting of: 5 cleaning buds made of wood with leather coating 1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 ml Order no.: 9400 8919 000

Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with a few drops of the cleaning solvent. Clean the thermal bar immediately with cleaning bud.

9-4

6.111.98.5.01.13


Maintenance

Cleaner for residues of glue from labels _______________________________________________________________________ ATTENTION

Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers! Damage to the coating -

Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar and rubber-covered roll!

_______________________________________________________________________ Label remover Aerosol can, 200ml Order no.: 9594 3000000

9

6.111.98.5.01.13

9-5

Maintenance

9.2


Maintenance

The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush or vacuum cleaner. Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on if necessary.

9.2.1

Testing the weight display

Place reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg. This test must be repeated at regular intervals.

9.2.2

9

Note on storing thermal paper

Store unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) in closed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max. 60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity. Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and if kept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative air humidity.

9.2.3

Ticket, label and Linerless rollers

To avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have been checked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with a corresponding number. We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls that have not been checked and approved by Bizerba. Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent near you: Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG Papier und Etiketten Harpener Hellweg 31 44805 Bochum 1 Germany Phone: +49 234 / 9557-0 FAX: +49 234 / 5070247

9-6

6.111.98.5.01.13


10

Technical data

10.1

Dimensions

Technical data

Scale BC II 800 L

Length:

W Width: H Overall height: H1 Complete height:

342 mm 462 mm 90 mm

H1

512 mm H W

10

L

Fig. 105: BC II 800 Scale BC II 100

L

Length:

360 mm

W Width:

432 mm

H Overall height:

174 mm

H

W L

Fig. 106: BC II 100 Scale BC II 200 L

Length:

360 mm

W Width:

487 mm

H Overall height:

174 mm

H1 Complete height:

461 mm

H1

H W L

Fig. 107: BC II 200 6.111.98.5.01.13

10 - 1

Technical data

10.2


Power supply

The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances. Technical data for the mains power supply Mains supply Single-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate. Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal: +6% to -10% of nominal value Supply frequency: 50/60 Hz

10

Permissible tolerance of mains frequency: +2% to -2% Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage x 5% Protective conductor leakage current max.: 3.5 mA

10.3

Environmental conditions

The following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales, POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices, equipment combinations and spare parts. For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

Threshold values Device family

Protection type in accordanc e with IP

EDP systems:

20

+15 (+60)

+30 (+87)

-10 (+14)

+43 (+109)

Retail scales

20

-10 (+14)

+40 (+104)

-20 (-4)

+60 (+140)

External devices 1

Temperature Relative humidity% oC Celsius (degF Fahrenheit) Operation Storage Operation Storage min. max. min. max. min. max. min.max. 1 8

80 90

20

80 90

The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply.

Bedewing of equipment is not permitted

10 - 2

6.111.98.5.01.13


Subject index A Addition of customer total, 7 - 85 Article Allocate supplementary text, 7 - 45 Assign barcode, 7 - 42 Assign product group, 7 - 41 Clear, 7 - 51 Data of origin, 7 - 44 Define, 7 - 40 Define article tare, 7 - 41 Define unit price, 7 - 41 Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42 Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43 Print list, 7 - 50 Report, 7 - 75 Text, 7 - 44 Type, 7 - 43 Weight class, 7 - 44 Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 35, 7 - 48 Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 29 Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 24 Automatic zerosetting, 7 - 87

B Back-calculation, 7 - 47 Barcode, 7 - 15 Assign Code 128, 7 - 28 Barcode structure example for Code 128, 7 - 26 Barcode structure example, EAN 13, 7 - 20 Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 61 Code 128, 7 - 23 Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 63 Create barcode structure, 7 - 58 Define structure, 7 - 58 Delete code structure, 7 - 62 EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 22 for article, 7 - 42 for non-PLU, 7 - 65 for PLU, 7 - 42 for total, 7 - 65 Height on label, 7 - 119 Height on ticket, 7 - 108 Instore code, Examples, 7 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.13

Subject index

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18, 7 - 21 manage, 7 - 62 Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17 Overview, 7 - 15 Print barcode structure, 7 - 62 Print code structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62 print on label, 7 - 119 print on ticket, 7 - 108 Beeper, on/off, 7 - 146 BLD BLD label list, 7 - 6, 7 - 68 BLD logo fields, 7 - 46 Delete BLD labels, 7 - 69 Delete BLD logos, 7 - 69 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 137 Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 137 Supplementary text for BLD text fields, 7 - 45 BLD Label example, 7 - 115 Select BLD labels, 7 - 118 BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 6, 7 - 45 By Count fixed weight, 7 - 47 Create, 7 - 33 Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 42 Overview, 7 - 33 By-Count Back-calculation, 7 - 47 Compulsory entry, 7 - 89 Create, 7 - 31 Database configuration, 7 - 30 Fixed weight mode, 7 - 47 Mandatory entry, 7 - 47 Overview, 7 - 30 Piece goods, 7 - 30

C Cancellation, 6 - 11 Cash register Cash register drawer, 6 - 44 Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4 Till function, 7 - 93 11 - 1

11

Subject index Change line, 7 - 10 Check digit, print on label, 7 - 123 Clean label printer, 9 - 3 Cleaning, 9 - 1 Cleaning printer, 9 - 2 Cleaning products, 9 - 4 Clear Header and footer texts, 7 - 56 RAM, 7 - 150 Supplementary texts, 7 - 56 Tare , 6 - 21

11

Operating instruction BC II Number of supplementary texts, 7 137 Set DHCP, 7 - 133 Set number of PLUs, 7 - 137 Set TCP-IP, 7 - 132 start, 7 - 139 Date , Representation, 7 - 83 Date/Time set, 7 - 81 Setting, 7 - 82 Decimal places, 7 - 138

Clear memory, 7 - 150

Define supplementary texts, erstellen, 7 - 52

Clearing RAM, 7 - 150

Deleting, Supplementary texts, 7 - 56

Code 128, 7 - 23 Assign Code 128, 7 - 28 Operating procedure for structure creation, 7 - 25 Structure example, 7 - 24, 7 - 26

Department number, 7 - 135

Commissioning, 4 - 8

Direct keys, 7 - 100

Conditions for the place of installation, 4 - 1

Display, 5 - 2 control lighting, 7 - 142 Icons, 5 - 2

Constant, 6 - 13, 7 - 91 Continuous operation, 7 - 36 Multicast IP address, 7 - 141 Multicast port number, 7 - 141 Overview, 7 - 36 Scale type, 7 - 140 UDP port number, 7 - 141 Customer total Addition, 7 - 87 Addition , 7 - 85 negative, 7 - 88 Rounding, 7 - 105

D Data field monitoring, 7 - 122 Data of origin, 7 - 44 automatic traceability no., 7 - 29 Manual input, 7 - 29 sales report, 7 - 77 Database configuration, 7 - 132 Memory management, 7 - 136 Number of items (ticket memory), 7 138 11 - 2

Designation label, 2 - 2 Device Configuration, 7 - 81 Device types, 2 - 1

Display ADC program version, 7 - 157 Display battery voltage, 7 - 159 Display program version, 7 - 158 Display test, 7 - 160 Display the load cell type, 7 - 157

E EAN 13, 7 - 18 Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 21 Example of structure definition, 7 - 20 Structure example, 7 - 19 End of label, 5 - 12 Environmental conditions, 10 - 2 Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2

F Fixed weight Back-calculation, 7 - 47 Create, 7 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II Overview, 7 - 32 Fixed weight , Database configuration, 7 - 30

Subject index Input Special characters, 7 - 11 Text, 7 - 9, 7 - 10

Font Change on label, 7 - 123 change on ticket, 7 - 111

Insert receipt paper, 5 - 11

Font type, change, 7 - 9

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18

Footer text Clear, 7 - 56 Define, 7 - 53 print on ticket, 7 - 109 Printing list, 7 - 55

IP address, Display, 7 - 133, 7 - 135

Foreign currency Calculation method, 7 - 130 Currency exchange rate, 7 - 131 Currency factor, 7 - 131 Currency symbol, 7 - 130 Decimal places, 7 - 130 print on label, 7 - 124 Print suppl. text on ticket, 7 - 110 Rounding, 7 - 131 Second currency display, 7 - 129 Select function, 7 - 129 Settings, 7 - 129

G General operating mode settings, 7 87 Guidelines, 2 - 4

H Header and footer text list, 7 - 4 Header text Clear, 7 - 56 Define, 7 - 53 Deleting, 7 - 56 print on label, 7 - 120 print on ticket, 7 - 109 Printing list, 7 - 55

I Initial display, 7 - 1 Initial setting, 7 - 3

6.111.98.5.01.13

Install label roll, 5 - 12 Installation, 4 - 1

K Key functions, 5 - 4 Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4 Functions, 5 - 4 Keyboard, 5 - 4 Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3 Keyboard selection, 7 - 149

11

Keys Function code table, 7 - 149 Modify function, 7 - 148 Konformitätserklärung, 3, 5

L Label Barcode printout, 7 - 119 Change font, 7 - 123 Data field monitoring, 7 - 122 Delete configuration, 7 - 128 Label distance, 7 - 118 Label height, 7 - 118 Print article label, 7 - 92 Print total label, 7 - 92 Printing speed, 7 - 126 Release print of: Alternative text for sell-by date, 7 120 Barcode, 7 - 119 Check digit, 7 - 123 Foreign currency, 7 - 124 Header text, 7 - 120 Logo, 7 - 120 Machine ID, 7 - 123 Operator No., 7 - 123 Packaged-on and sell-by date, 7 118

11 - 3

Subject index Price range and texts, 7 - 123 Tare, 7 - 119 Save configuration, 7 - 127 Select configuration, 7 - 128 Set barcode height, 7 - 119 Set date field start, 7 - 121 Set feed, 7 - 155 Set text field start, 7 - 121

11


M Machine ID, print on label, 7 - 123 Main operating mode, 7 - 3, 7 - 84 select, 7 - 85 Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3 Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6

Label design, Overview, 7 - 114

Manual input, 6 - 9

Label printer, 5 - 12

Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17

Label type , 7 - 117

Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3

Labeling mode, 7 - 97

Memory management, 7 - 136

Labels Delete BLD labels, 7 - 69 Device Configuration, 7 - 116 Move print format, 7 - 155 Multi- printing, 6 - 7, 6 - 8 Multiple printing, 7 - 98 Price labeling mode, 6 - 6 Price labeling mode , 6 - 5 Print BLD label list, 7 - 68 Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 rotated layout, 7 - 124 Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Menu call-up, 7 - 2

Leveling of scale, 4 - 2 Lists Barcode structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62 BLD label list, 7 - 6 Communication settings, 7 - 135 Delete header and footer text list, 7 56 Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 56 Header and footer text list, 7 - 4, 7 55 Logo list, 7 - 7 Menu settings, 7 - 153 PLU (articles), 7 - 4 PLU article list, 7 - 50 PLU direct keys, 7 - 5, 7 - 103 Supplementary text list, 7 - 5, 7 - 55 Weighing system information, 7 - 154 Logbook monitoring, 7 - 160 Logo BLD, 7 - 46 Delete, 7 - 68 Print list, 7 - 68

11 - 4

Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150 Minus amount, 6 - 10 Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2, 7 - 91 Multiplication Minus amount, 6 - 10 PLU price per piece, 6 - 16 Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9

N Negative customer total, 7 - 88 Network Display IP address, 7 - 135 Settings, 7 - 132 Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 64 Numeric code , 7 - 59

O Operating conditions, 2 - 5 Operating options Labels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 8 Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 7 Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2 Overview, 6 - 2 Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6 Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Operational safety, 3 - 2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II Operator, Report, 7 - 77 Operator items display , 7 - 93 Operator report, 7 - 77

Subject index Print list, 7 - 50 registration, 6 - 16 Report, 7 - 75 Round article total, 7 - 105 Set number, 7 - 137 Tare , 6 - 21 Weight class, 7 - 44

Operator tare, 6 - 22 call up value saved, 6 - 23 save value entered, 6 - 22 save weighed value, 6 - 22

PLU , Define unit price, 7 - 41

Overview of list, 7 - 4

PLU list, 7 - 4

Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16

PLU maintenance, 7 - 39 Define PLU, 7 - 40

P

Power supply, 10 - 2

Packaged-on date Alternative text, 7 - 126 print on label, 7 - 118

Price calculation, 7 - 104

Paper Label printer, 5 - 13 Receipt printer, 5 - 11

Price overwrite, 6 - 16

Paper end detection, 7 - 156 Paper type, 7 - 84 Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150 Payment in/out, 6 - 44, 7 - 94 Release printout on ticket, 7 - 112

Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6, 7 97 Price overwriting, 7 - 43 Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9 Print boot log information, 7 - 152 Print communication settings, 7 - 135 Print direct keys list, 7 - 5 Print fonts, 7 - 153

Place of installation, 4 - 1

Print logbook, 7 - 162

PLU, 5 - 5 -Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16 Allocate supplementary text, 7 - 45 Article text, 7 - 44 Assign barcode, 7 - 42 Assign product group, 7 - 41 call, 6 - 14 Clear, 7 - 51 Define, 7 - 40 Define PLU tare, 7 - 41 Direct key allocation, 7 - 100 Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42 Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 15 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 137 Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 137 Number of supplementary texts per PLU, 7 - 137 Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43 Print article label, 7 - 92 Print direct keys list, 7 - 5

Print menu settings, 7 - 153 Weighing system information, 7 - 154

6.111.98.5.01.13

Print PLU Direct key mode, 7 - 100 Enter number of digits, 7 - 100 input mode, 7 - 99 Number of digits for input, 7 - 100 Print direct keys, 7 - 103 Range limit, 7 - 101 Print PLU , Device Configuration, 7 100 Print supplement. text list, 7 - 5 Print weighing system information, 7 - 154 Printer, 5 - 8 Label printer, 5 - 12 Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 , 5-9 Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8 Receipt printer, 5 - 11

11 - 5

11

Subject index Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8 test, 7 - 152 Thermal print head, 5 - 10 Printer settings, 7 - 155 Change printing intensity , 7 - 156 Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10 Printing speed, 7 - 126 Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 66 Product group report, 7 - 76 Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 41 Product with data of origin, 6 - 45 Programming overview, 7 - 163

Q Quick- service mode, 7 - 96

11

Quick-service mode, 6 - 4

R Range limit, 7 - 101 Receipt printer, 5 - 11 Receipt printer paper end, 5 - 11 Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6 Icons, 4 - 7 Reports, 7 - 72 Customer title for reports, 7 - 73 on label, 7 - 79 on ticket, 7 - 74 Operator, 7 - 77 PLU articles, 7 - 75 PLU products, 7 - 75 Product groups, 7 - 76 Scales, 7 - 74 Traceability data sales, 7 - 77, 7 - 78 VAT report, 7 - 79


S Safety instructions, 3 - 1 Sales Clear, 7 - 80 Display, 7 - 80 Print on label, 7 - 79 Sales calculation, 7 - 89 Sales calculation, Release addition, 7 - 89 Scale Payment in/out, 6 - 44 Sensitivity, 7 - 147 Turn-of f time, 7 - 143 with cash drawer, 6 - 44 Scale number, 7 - 135 Scale report, 7 - 74 Scale switch-off time, 7 - 143 Scales network, Continuous operation, 7 - 36 Scroll function, 6 - 12 Scrolling messages activate, 7 - 90 activating, 7 - 14, 7 - 90 Define text, 7 - 14, 7 - 54 Delete text, 7 - 57 print, 7 - 5 select, 7 - 90 Select display location, 7 - 90 Settings, 7 - 90 test, 7 - 91 Second currency, 7 - 151 Change main currency, 7 - 151 Convert PLU price, 7 - 151 Select layout Label layout, 7 - 85, 7 - 86 Receipt layout, 7 - 85 Ticket layout, 7 - 86

Reverification, 2 - 3

Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Rounding, 7 - 104 By-Count, 7 - 106 Foreign currency, 7 - 131 Supplementary text, 7 - 110

Sell-by date Alternative text on label, 7 - 120 Print on label, 7 - 118

11 - 6

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II Print texts, 7 - 123

Subject index Printing, 7 - 55

Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 147

Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3

Service menu, 7 - 152

Switch off, 6 - 1

Set width of paper , 5 - 13

Switch on, 6 - 1

Setting IP address, einstellen, 7 - 133

Switching operation mode, 7 - 3, 7 86 select, 7 - 86

Setting machine ID, einstellen, 7 - 136 Settings Date, 7 - 82 Date representation, 7 - 83 Department number, 7 - 135 different operating modes, 7 - 85 Display lighting, 7 - 142 DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 134 Euro, 7 - 151 for different operating modes, 7 - 87 Foreign currency, 7 - 129 Gateway, 7 - 133 Host name, 7 - 134 IP address, 7 - 133 Machine ID, 7 - 136 Main operating mode, 7 - 84 Multiple-operator mode, 7 - 91 Network, 7 - 132 Non-PLU, 7 - 64 Price calculation, 7 - 104 Price labeling mode, 7 - 97 Print menu settings, 7 - 153 Printer, 7 - 155 Quick service mode, 7 - 96 Quick-service mode, 7 - 96 Scale number, 7 - 135 Scrolling messages, 7 - 90 Sensitivity, 7 - 147 Subnet mask, 7 - 133 Switching operating mode, 7 - 86 TCP-IP , 7 - 132 Time, 7 - 82 Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 82

System Continuous operation, 7 - 36 Identification on system, 7 - 37 Installation, 4 - 5 Multicast IP address, 7 - 141 Multicast port number, 7 - 141 Scale type, 7 - 140 System conditions, 7 - 37 System set-up, 7 - 37 Take device out of the system, 7 - 38 UDP port number, 7 - 141

11

T Talon, 6 - 25, 7 - 94 Tare Fixed value memory, 7 - 104 print on label, 7 - 119 print on ticket, 7 - 109 Tare Batch tare, 6 - 19 clear, 6 - 21 Manual tare, 6 - 20 Operator tare, 6 - 22, 6 - 23 PLU tare, 7 - 41 Tare %, 7 - 49 unknown tare, 6 - 18 Tare functions, 6 - 18 PLU tare, 6 - 21 Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 21

Side cover , 5 - 8

Test printing, 7 - 152

Special characters, 7 - 11

Text Alternative text for packaged-on date, 7 - 126 Alternative text for use-by date, 7 126 Define header and footer text, 7 - 53 Deleting, 7 - 56 Enter PLU text, 7 - 44 Function keys, 7 - 13

Standards, 2 - 4 Subtotal, 6 - 13 Supplementary text for BLD text fields, 7 - 45 for PLU, 7 - 45 Supplementary texts Clear, 7 - 56 6.111.98.5.01.13

11 - 7

Subject index Input, 7 - 9 print Header and footer text, 7 - 4, 7 - 55 Supplementary texts, 7 - 5 Printing out overview, 7 - 55 Scrolling messages, 7 - 54 Suppl. article text, 7 - 45 Supplementary text, 7 - 52 Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2 Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6 Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10

11

Ticket Assisted sales, 6 - 24 Change font, 7 - 111 Correct feed, 7 - 156 Device Configuration, 7 - 108 Number of article text lines, 7 - 111 Open ticket again, 6 - 26, 6 - 27, 7 94 Open tickets, 7 - 88 Print cancellation, 7 - 95 Print foreign currency, 7 - 112 print upon request, 6 - 25 Printing if requested, 7 - 95 Printing VAT included, 7 - 95 Release print of: Amount paid in/out, 7 - 112 Barcode, 7 - 108 footer text, 7 - 109 Foreign currency suppl. text, 7 - 110 Header text, 7 - 109 Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 110 Supplementary product text, 7 - 112 Tare, 7 - 109 Repeat ticket, 6 - 26 Set barcode height, 7 - 108 Ticket counter, 7 - 111 Ticket repetition, 7 - 94 Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 107 Time, Setting, 7 - 82 Total, 6 - 13 Rounding of article total, 7 - 105 Rounding of customer total, 7 - 105 Total , Total label, 7 - 85 Total sales report, 7 - 79 Clear, 7 - 80 Display, 7 - 80

11 - 8

Operating instruction BC II Traceability data, 6 - 45 Traceability marker, 7 - 29, 7 - 88 Define traceability number, 7 - 88 Manual input, 7 - 29 PLU data of origin, 7 - 44

U Unit price, programming, 7 - 41 Unit price input, 6 - 9 via 10-key keypad, 6 - 9 Use-by date, 7 - 42 Alternative text, 7 - 126 for non-PLU, 7 - 64

V VAT can be overwritten, 7 - 48 Define for all articles, 7 - 71 Define tax rate, 7 - 70 for non-PLU, 7 - 67 for non-PLU minus, 7 - 67 for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 67 incl. or exclusive, 7 - 70 List, 7 - 8 Maintain, 7 - 69 manage, 7 - 71 Overview, 7 - 34 Printing list, 7 - 71 Text , 7 - 70 Vendors Keys, 7 - 99 Number, 7 - 123 Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5 Verification information, 2 - 3

W Waagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5 Weight class, 7 - 44 Weight input, Manual, 6 - 17 WLAN Functional diagnosis, 7 - 146 on/off, 7 - 143

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II Settings, 7 - 144, 7 - 145 Switch on, 7 - 144

Subject index

Z Zerosetting, 6 - 1, 7 - 87

Y Year , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 82

11

6.111.98.5.01.13

11 - 9

Subject index


11

11 - 10

6.111.98.5.01.13


Appendix Declaration of Conformity for BC ll Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2

6.111.98.5.01.13

Appendix

Appendix


6.111.98.5.01.13

Hauptverwaltung Balingen Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65 72336 Balingen, Germany

Declaration of type conformity We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described below Definition: retail scale Type:

BC II . . . (BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate:

D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approval certificate:

0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current requirements of the following EC directives: Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments

2009/23/EG (90/384/EWG)

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility

2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications: Metrology:

DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC:

DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09 DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety:

DIN EN 60950-1/

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type conformity of a notified body. This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba. The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.

Date: June

27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer:

ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title:

Matthias Harsch Chief Executive Officer-Sales (CEO-S) Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG

6.111.98.5.01.13

6.111.98.5.01.13

Hauptverwaltung Balingen Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65 72336 Balingen, Germany

Declaration of type conformity We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described below Definition: retail scale Type:

BC II . . . with WLAN (BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate:

D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approval certificate:

0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current requirements of the following EC directives: Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments

2009/23/EG

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility

2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications: Metrology:

DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC:

DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09 DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety:

DIN EN 60950-1

WLAN:

See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer.

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type conformity of a notified body. This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba. The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.

Date:

June 27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer:

ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title:

Matthias Harsch Chief Executive Officer-Sales (CEO-S) Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG

6.111.98.5.01.13

eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2 1/5

6.111.98.5.01.13


6.111.98.5.01.13


6.111.98.5.01.13


6.111.98.5.01.13


6.111.98.5.01.13

Manual Operare Bizerba En

Recommend Documents